You are on page 1of 312

2005 MDX Online Reference Owner's Manual

Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety................................................................................................................ ii
Important Handling Information. ........................................................................................... iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance................................................................................................................... 4
Driver and Passenger Safety ............................................................................................................ 7
Seat belts, SRS, and child protection.
Instruments and Controls................................................................................................................. 57
Indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column.
Features ............................................................................................................................................. 105
Climate, audio, rear entertainment, steering wheel, secruity, cruise control, HomeLink and Onstar
Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 185
Fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading.
Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 197
Engine and transmission operation.
Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 227
Schedules, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage.
Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 259
Flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses.
Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 281
Vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 295
Warranty and contact information.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 299
How to order.
Index..................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
Fluid capacities and tire pressures.
Main Menu

Owner’s Identification

OWNER This Owner’s Manual should be considered


a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models of


ADDRESS the MDX. You may find descriptions of
STREET equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.

The information and specifications included


CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time
POSTAL CODE of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
V. I. N. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
DELIVERY DATE without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
ADDRESS votre concessionnaire de
STREET commander le numéro de pièce
33S3V840

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/


POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE
Main Menu

Introduction

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2005 Acura MDX was a wise investment. As you read this manual, you will
It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to read information is intended to help you
this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights WARNING: This product contains
and responsibilities. or emits chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual and birth defects or other
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. reproductive harm.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’s
staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. Event Data Recorders
Your Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to
answer any questions and concerns. This vehicle is equipped with one or
more recording devices commonly
referred to as ‘‘event data recorders’’
or ‘‘sensing and diagnostic modules.’’

i
Main Menu

A Few Words About Safety

Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
responsibility. Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
To help you make informed These signal words mean:
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
other information on labels and in HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
hurt you or others. HURT if you don’t follow instructions.

Of course, it is not practical or You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow


possible to warn you about all the instructions.
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
use your own good judgement. Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.

ii
Main Menu

Important Handling Information

Your MDX has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.

These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.

For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 198 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 223 . Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or an accident.

iii
Main Menu

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.59) MOONROOF (P.93) CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P.106)


GAUGES (P.68)

AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK (P.112)
SWITCHES
(P.82)

MIRROR GLOVE BOX


CONTROLS (P.102)
(P.96)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.92)

HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.188)

FUEL FILL DOOR PARKING BRAKE REAR A/C CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
RELEASE PEDAL (P.111) (P.104)
(P.187) (P.94)

4
Main Menu

Your Vehicle at a Glance

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS VTM-4 LOCK PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF

Your Vehicle at a Glance


(P.76) (P.204) INDICATOR (P.33)

HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
(P.74) REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.77)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST SYSTEM
OFF SWITCH HAZARD WARNING
(P.212) BUTTON
(P.76)

CRUISE CONTROL
(P.146)

FOG LIGHTS HORN*


(P.77)

REMOTE AUDIO STEERING WHEEL CRUISE CONTROL WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS


CONTROLS ADJUSTMENT (P.147) (P.71)
(P.130) (P.78)

*: To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘A’’ logo.
5
Main Menu

6
Main Menu

Driver and Passenger Safety

This section gives you important Additional Information About Your All Children Should Sit in a Back
information about how to protect Seat Belts .................................. 21 Seat ............................................ 36
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belt System Components ... 21 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21 Can Pose Serious Risks to

Driver and Passenger Safety


properly. It explains how your Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ........ 22 Children ................................ 36
airbags work, and it tells you how to Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 23 If You Must Drive with Several
properly restrain infants and Additional Information About Your Children .................................... 38
children in your vehicle. Airbags ...................................... 24 If a Child Requires Close
Airbag System Components ....... 24 Attention ................................... 38
How Your Front Airbags Work......... 26 Additional Safety Precautions .... 38
Advanced Airbag ......................... 28 Protecting infants and
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 29 Small Children.......................... 40
How Your Side Curtain Airbag Protecting Infants ........................ 40
Important Safety Precautions .......... 8 Work.......................................... 31 Protecting Small Children .......... 41
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 9 How the SRS Indicator Light Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 43
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 Works ........................................ 32 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 44
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 13 How The Side Airbag Off With LATCH ................................ 45
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 13 Indicator Works ....................... 32 With a Seat Belt ........................... 47
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 14 How the Passenger Airbag With a Tether ............................... 48
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 15 Off Indicator Works ................ 33 Protecting Larger Children ............ 50
5. Fasten and Position the Seat Airbag Service .............................. 33 Checking Seat Belt Fit .................... 51
Belts ...................................... 16 Additional Safety Precautions .... 34 Using a Booster Seat ....................... 51
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children − General When Can a Child Sit in Front ....... 52
Position ................................. 18 Guidelines ................................. 35 Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 54
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18 All Children Must Be Safety Labels .................................... 55
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19 Restrained ................................ 35

7
Main Menu Table of Contents

Important Safety Precautions

You’ll find many safety Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed
recommendations throughout this While airbags can save lives, they Excessive speed is a major factor in
section, and throughout this manual. can cause serious or fatal injuries to crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
The recommendations on this page occupants who sit too close to them, the higher the speed, the greater the
are the ones we consider to be the or are not properly restrained. risk, but serious injuries can also
most important. Infants, young children, and short occur at lower speeds. Never drive
adults are at the greatest risk. Be faster than is safe for current
Always Wear Your Seat Belt sure to follow all instructions and conditions, regardless of the
A seat belt is your best protection in warnings in this manual. maximum speed posted.
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts, Don’t Drink and Drive Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
not replace them. So even though Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even Condition
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, one drink can reduce your ability to Having a tire blowout or a
make sure you and your passengers respond to changing conditions, and mechanical failure can be extremely
always wear your seat belts, and your reaction time gets worse with hazardous. To reduce the possibility
wear them properly (see page 16 ). every additional drink. So don’t drink of such problems, check your tire
and drive, and don’t let your friends pressures and condition frequently,
Restrain All Children drink and drive, either. and perform all regularly scheduled
Children age 12 and under should maintenance (see page 231 ).
ride properly restrained in a back
seat. Infants and small children
should be restrained in a child seat.
Larger children should use a booster
seat and a lap/shoulder belt until
they can use the belt properly
without a booster seat (see page 51 ).

8
Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many


(9) (3) (1) (4) (11) features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
(10) during a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety


(7) Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment; front and rear crush
zones; a collapsible steering column;
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.

(10) (6)
(5) (7) (8) (2)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(2) (5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(9) Door Locks
(10) Side Airbags
(11) Side Curtain Airbags CONTINUED

9
Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

However, you and your passengers Seat Belts


can’t take full advantage of these Your vehicle is equipped with seat
features unless you remain sitting in belts in all seating positions. Not wearing a seat belt properly
a proper position and always wear increases the chance of serious
your seat belts. In fact, some safety Your seat belt system also includes injury or death in a crash, even
features can contribute to injuries if an indicator on the instrument panel though your vehicle has airbags.
they are not used properly. to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts. Be sure you and your
The following pages explain how you passengers always wear seat
can take an active role in protecting Why Wear Seat Belts belts and wear them properly.
yourself and your passengers. Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller When properly worn, seat belts:
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.) Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
Not wearing a seat belt properly vehicle’s built-in safety features.
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even Help protect you in almost every
though your vehicle has airbags. type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
In addition, most states and all rollovers.
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.

10
Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Help keep you from being thrown Airbags


against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.

Driver and Passenger Safety


Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good position


should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannot Your vehicle has a Supplemental Your vehicle also has side airbags to
completely protect you in every Restraint System (SRS) with front help protect the upper torso of the
crash. But in most cases, seat belts airbags to help protect the heads and driver or a front seat passenger
can reduce your risk of serious chests of the driver and a front seat during a moderate to severe side
injury. passenger during a moderate to impact (see page 29 for more
severe frontal collision (see page information on how your side airbags
What you should do: Always wear 26 for more information on how work).
your seat belt, and make sure you your front airbags work).
wear it properly.

CONTINUED

11
Main Menu Table of Contents

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel while allowing full
They are designed to supplement control of the vehicle. A front
the seat belts. passenger should move their seat as
far back from the dashboard as
Airbags offer no protection in rear possible.
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions. The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
Airbags can pose serious hazards. can maximize your safety.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So Remember, however, that no safety
Your vehicle also has side curtain while airbags help save lives, they system can prevent all injuries or
airbags to help protect the heads of can cause minor injuries or more deaths that can occur in a severe
the driver, front passenger, and serious or even fatal injuries if crash, even when seat belts are
passengers in the outer rear seating occupants are not properly properly worn and the airbags deploy.
positions during a moderate to restrained or sitting properly.
severe side impact or rollover (see
page 31 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).

12 Driver and Passenger Safety


Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction 1.Close and Lock the Doors 2.Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide After everyone has entered the
instructions on how to properly vehicle, be sure the doors and
protect the driver, adult passengers, tailgate are closed and locked.

Driver and Passenger Safety


and teenagers who are large enough
and mature enough to ride in the Your vehicle has a door
front seat. monitor indicator on the
instrument panel to indicate when a
See pages 35 − 39 for important specific door or the tailgate is not
guidelines on how to properly tightly closed.
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your Locking the doors reduces the
vehicle. chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
accidentally opening a door and rear as possible while allowing you to
falling out. maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
Locking the doors also helps prevent seat as far to the rear as possible.
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.

See page 82 for how to lock the


doors, and page 62 for how the door
monitor indicator works.

13
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs


wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. If your seat is adjusted manually,
rock it back and forth to make sure
If you cannot get far enough away the seat is locked in position. See
from the steering wheel and still page 86 for more information on Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
reach the controls, we recommend how to adjust the front seats. comfortable, upright position,
that you investigate whether some leaving ample space between your
type of adaptive equipment may help. chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-


backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.

14
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints

Reclining the seat-back too far Improperly positioning head


can result in serious injury or restraints reduces their

Driver and Passenger Safety


death in a crash. effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well Make sure head restraints are
back in the seat. in place and positioned properly
before driving.

Reclining a seat-back so that the


shoulder part of the belt no longer Properly adjusted head restraints
rests against the occupant’s chest will help protect occupants from
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so whiplash and other crash injuries.
the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against
of sliding under the belt in a crash the center of the restraint. See page 88 for how to adjust the
and being seriously injured. The head restraints.
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers with adjustable
greater the risk of injury. head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
See page 86 for how to adjust the should adjust their restraint as high
seat-backs. as possible.

CONTINUED

15
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

5.Fasten and Position the Seat If necessary, pull up on the shoulder


Belts belt again to remove any slack, then
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, check that the belt rests across the
then tug on the belt to make sure the center of your chest and over your
belt is securely latched. Check that shoulder.
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious This spreads the forces of a crash
injuries in a crash. over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
The second row center seat, and
both third row seats, have a
detachable shoulder belt that can be
unlatched and retracted, to allow the Improperly positioning the seat
seats to be folded down. See page Position the lap part of the belt as belts can cause serious injury
88 for how to unlatch and relatch low as possible across your hips, or death in a crash.
the seat belts. then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. Make sure all seat belts are
This lets your strong pelvic bones properly positioned before
take the force of a crash and reduces driving.
the chance of internal injuries.

16
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

If the seat belt touches or crosses The front seats have adjustable seat Never place the shoulder portion of a
your neck, or if it crosses your arm belt anchors. lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
instead of your shoulder, you need to To adjust the height of an belt behind your back. This could cause
adjust the seat belt anchor height. anchor, squeeze the two release very serious injuries in a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety


buttons and slide the anchor up or
RELEASE down as needed (it has four If a seat belt does not seem to work
BUTTONS
positions). as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.

No one should sit in a seat with an


inoperative seat belt. Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.

See page 21 for additional


information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.

17
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

6.Maintain a Proper Sitting In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women
Position position in the front seat can be
After all occupants have adjusted seriously or fatally injured in a crash
their seats and put on seat belts, it is by striking interior parts of the
very important that they continue to vehicle or being struck by an
sit upright, well back in their seats, inflating front airbag.
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly or out of
Sitting improperly can increase the position can result in serious
chance of injury during a crash. For injury or death in a crash.
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits Always sit upright, well back in
forward, leans forward or sideways, the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to
or puts one or both feet up, the floor. protect yourself and your unborn
chance of injury during a crash is child when driving or riding in a
greatly increased. vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.

18
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

When driving, remember to sit Additional Safety Precautions Two people should never use the
upright and adjust the seat as far Never let passengers ride in the same seat belt. If they do, they
back as possible while allowing full cargo area or on top of a folded- could be very seriously injured in a
control of the vehicle. When riding down back seat. If they do, they crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety


as a front passenger, adjust the seat could be very seriously injured in a
as far back as possible. crash. Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
This will reduce the risk of injuries Passengers should not stand up or occupant comfort or reposition the
to both you and your unborn child change seats while the vehicle is shoulder part of a seat belt can
that can be caused by a crash or an moving. A passenger who is not reduce the protective capability of
inflating front airbag. wearing a seat belt during a crash the seat belt and increase the
or emergency stop can be thrown chance of serious injury in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask against the inside of the vehicle,
your doctor if it’s okay for you to against other occupants, or out of Do not place hard or sharp objects
drive. the vehicle. between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.

CONTINUED

19
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Adults and Teens

Keep your hands and arms away


from the airbag covers. If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on


the front airbag covers. Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Do not attach hard objects on or


near a door. If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other hard object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.

20
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt To fasten the belt, insert the latch
Your seat belt system includes lap/ The lap/shoulder belts in the center plate into the buckle, then tug on the
shoulder belts in all seven seating seat of the second row and both of belt to make sure the buckle is
positions. The front seat belts are the third row seats are equipped with latched (see page 16 for how to

Driver and Passenger Safety


also equipped with automatic seat a detachable anchor that has two properly position the belt).
belt tensioners. parts: a small latch plate and a
buckle. To unlock the belt, push the red
The seat belt system PRESS button on the buckle. Guide
includes an indicator on the The detachable anchor should the belt across your body so that it
instrument panel and a beeper to normally be latched whenever the retracts completely. After exiting the
remind you and your passengers to seats-backs are in an upright position. vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
fasten your belts. way and will not get closed in the
The lap and shoulder belt goes over door.
If you turn the ignition to ON (II) your shoulder, across your chest,
before fastening your seat belt, the and across your hips. All seat belts have an emergency
beeper will sound and the indicator locking retractor. In normal driving,
will flash. If you do not fasten your the retractor lets you move freely in
seat belt before the beeper stops, the your seat while it keeps some
indicator will stop flashing but tension on the belt. During a collision
remain on. or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
If you continue driving without restrain your body.
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals.
CONTINUED

21
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

The seat belts in all seating positions Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners If a side curtain airbag deploys
except the driver’s have an additional during a side impact, the tensioner
locking mechanism that must be on that side of the vehicle will also
activated to secure a child seat (see deploy.
page 47 ).
The tensioners can also be activated
If the shoulder part of the belt is during a collision in which the front
pulled all the way out, the locking airbags do not deploy. In this case, the
mechanism will activate. The belt airbags would not be needed, but the
will retract, but it will not allow the additional restraint could be helpful.
passenger to move freely.
When the tensioners are activated,
To deactivate the locking the seat belts will remain tight until
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and they are unbuckled in the normal
let the seat belt fully retract. To For added protection, the front seat manner.
refasten the belt, pull it out only as belts are equipped with automatic
far as needed. seat belt tensioners. When activated, If the front seat belt tensioners ever
the tensioners immediately tighten activate, they must be replaced as
the belts to help hold the driver and the belts will no longer retract
a front passenger in place. properly.
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause the front airbags to
deploy, or if a sensor detects your
vehicle is about to rollover (see page
31 ).

22
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,


For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A
condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a Not checking or maintaining
crash may not provide the same level seat belts can result in serious

Driver and Passenger Safety


Pull each belt out fully and look for of protection in a subsequent crash. injury or death if the seat belts
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check do not work properly when
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the needed.
the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace
not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat Check your seat belts regularly
may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a and have any problem
249 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced. corrected as soon as possible.
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and For information on how to clean your
should be replaced as soon as seat belts, see page 249 .
possible.

Acura provides a lifetime warranty


on seat belts for U.S. models. See
your Acura Warranty Information
booklet for details.

23
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Airbag System Components Your Airbag System (SRS) includes:

(7) (6) (1) (9) Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint


(11) System) front airbags. The driver’s
(2) airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ).

(5) Two side airbags, one for the


(9) driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
(3) in the outer edges of the seat-
(4) backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page 29 ).
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag Two side curtain airbags, one for
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(8) each side of the vehicle. The
(4) Seat Belt Tensioners airbags are stored in the front and
(5) Side Airbags rear pillars and above the windows.
(6) Side Curtain Airbags (10) The front and rear pillars on both
(7) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor (10)
(8) Front Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors sides are marked ‘‘SIDE
(9) Front Impact Sensor (8) (5) (4) CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
(10) Side Impact Sensors 31 ).
(11) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

24
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the Emergency backup power in case
tensioners (see page 22 ). weight on the front passenger’s your vehicle’s electrical system is
seat. If the weight of an infant or disconnected in a crash.
Sensors that can detect a small child is detected, the

Driver and Passenger Safety


moderate to severe front impact or passenger’s front airbag will be An indicator on the instrument
side impact. turned off (see page 33 ). panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
Height and position sensors that A rollover sensor that can detect if turned off (see page 32 ).
can detect whether a child is in the your vehicle is about to roll over
passenger’s side airbag path and and signal the control unit to An indicator on the dashboard that
signal the control unit to turn the deploy both side curtain airbags alerts you that the passenger’s
airbag off (see page 33 ). and front seat belt tensioners (see front airbag has been turned off
page 31 ). (see page 33 ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat A sophisticated electronic system
from the front airbag. If the seat is that continually monitors and
too far forward, the airbag will records information about the
inflate with less force (see page sensors, the control unit, the
28 ). airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is in ON (II).

CONTINUED

25
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally


inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of a


collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags will
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly the advanced airbag system has
inflate the driver’s and front turned the passenger’s airbag off
passenger’s airbags, at the time and (see page 33 ).
with the force needed.

26
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment

Driver and Passenger Safety


they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
depending on crash severity. or not the occupant is wearing a seat
After a crash, you may see what belt.
looks like smoke. This is actually In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbag’s surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
people with respiratory problems lower threshold, because the
may experience some temporary In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite first, then the second stage protection.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite a split second later. This
so. provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.

27
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to work


properly: PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
DRIVER’S SENSOR
Occupants must sit upright and SEAT
wear their seat belts properly. POSITION
SENSOR
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors, The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
or put any cargo or metal objects system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
under the front seats. sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Acura does
positioned too far forward, the not encourage carrying an infant or
Back-seat passengers should not airbag will inflate with less force, small child in front, if the sensors
put their feet under the front seats. regardless of the severity of the detect the weight of an infant or
impact. small child, the system will
Failure to follow these instructions If there is a problem with the sensor, automatically turn the passenger’s
could damage the sensors or prevent the SRS indicator will come on, and front airbag off.
them from working properly. the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.

28
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

When the airbag is turned off, an Moving the front seat forcibly How Your Side Airbags Work
indicator in the center of the back against cargo on the seat or
dashboard will come on indicating floor behind it.
passenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

Driver and Passenger Safety


33 ). Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
If there is no passenger in the front items in the seat-back pocket.
seat, the airbag will be off. However,
the Passenger Airbag Off indicator
will not come on.

Objects placed on the front


passenger seat can also cause the
passenger airbag to be shut off.
If you ever have a moderate to
To ensure that the passenger’s severe side impact, sensors will
advanced front airbag system will detect rapid deceleration and signal
work properly, do not do anything the control unit to instantly inflate
that would increase or decrease the either the driver’s or the passenger’s
weight on the front passenger’s seat. side airbag.
This includes:

A rear passenger pushing or


pulling on the back of the
passenger’s seat.
CONTINUED

29
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the Side Airbag Off Indicator
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff comes on (see page 32 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s system designed primarily to protect passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger’s passenger is out of the airbag’s
is no passenger. seat. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Acura does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if the height
should wear their seat belts and sit and position sensors in the seat There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. detect a child has leaned into the the moment the passenger moves
side airbag’s deployment path, the into or out of the airbag deployment
airbag will shut off. path and when the indicator comes
on or goes off.

A front seat passenger should not


use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.

30
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How Your Side Curtain Airbags If the impact is on the passenger’s In a Rollover
Work side, the passenger’s side curtain If the rollover sensor detects your
airbag will inflate even if there are no vehicle is about roll over, the control
occupants on that side of the vehicle. unit will instantly deploy both side

Driver and Passenger Safety


curtain airbags.

To get the best protection from the


side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.

In a Side Impact
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid deceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.

31
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the SRS Indicator Works How the Side Airbag Off
The SRS indicator alerts Indicator Works
you to a potential problem Ignoring the SRS indicator can U.S. Canada
with your airbags, sensors, or seat result in serious injury or death This indicator
belt tensioners. if the airbag systems, or alerts you that the
tensioners do not work properly. passenger’s side airbag has been
When you turn the ignition switch to automatically shut off. It does not
ON (II), this indicator will come on Have your vehicle checked by a mean there is a problem with your
briefly then go out. This tells you the dealer as soon as possible if side airbags.
system is working properly. the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem. When you turn the ignition switch to
If the indicator comes on at any ON (II), the indicator should come
other time, or does not come on at all, on briefly and go out (see page 60 ).
you should have the system checked If you see any of these indications, If it doesn’t come on, stays on, or
by your dealer. For example: the airbags and seat belt tensioners comes on while driving without a
may not work properly when you passenger in the front seat, have the
If the SRS indicator does not come need them. system checked.
on after you turn the ignition to
ON (II).

If the indicator stays on after the


engine starts.

If the indicator comes on or


flashes on and off while you drive.

32
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

How the Passenger Airbag Off If no one is riding in the front seat, Airbag Service
Indicator Works the airbag will be automatically shut Your airbag systems are virtually
off, but the indicator will not come maintenance free, and there are no
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR on. parts you can safely service.

Driver and Passenger Safety


However, you must have your
However, if the indicator comes on vehicle serviced if:
with no passenger in the front, or
with an adult in the seat, there may An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
be a problem with the advanced that has deployed must be
airbag system. Have the vehicle replaced along with the control
checked by the dealer as soon as unit and other related parts. Any
possible. seat belt tensioner that activates
must also be replaced.
The Passenger Airbag Off indicator
may also come on and go off Do not try to remove or replace
This indicator alerts you that the repeatedly if total weight on the seat any airbag by yourself. This must
passenger’s front airbag has been is near the airbag cutoff threshold. be done by your dealer or a
shut off because weight sensors knowledgeable body shop.
detect the weight of an infant or If this happens, have the passenger
small child on the front passenger’s ride properly restrained in a back The SRS indicator alerts you to a
seat. It does not mean there is a seat. If the passenger must ride in problem. Take your vehicle to an
problem with the airbag. front, move the seat as far to the authorized dealer as soon as
rear as possible, have the passenger possible. If you ignore this
sit upright, and wear the seat belt indication, your airbags may not
properly. operate properly.

33
Main Menu Table of Contents

Additional Information About Your Airbags

If your vehicle has a moderate to Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat-
severe impact. Even if your Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting
airbags do not inflate, your dealer airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing
should inspect the driver’s seat seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers
position sensor and the front protection. can prevent your side airbags from
passenger’s weight sensors to inflating during a side impact.
make sure they are operating Do not tamper with airbag
properly. components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.

Do not remove or modify a front


seat without consulting your
dealer. This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact Acura
Client Services at 800-382-2238.

34
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained


Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be

Driver and Passenger Safety


properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 50 − 53 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 40 − 50 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.

35
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can
safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
The National Highway Traffic Safety force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
Administration and Transport child with enough force to kill or
Canada recommend that all children Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
age 12 and under be properly advanced front airbag system, which
restrained in a back seat. can automatically turn the Larger Children
passenger’s front airbag off (see Children who have outgrown child
Children who ride in back are less page 33 ), please follow the seats are also at risk of being injured
likely to be injured by striking guidelines below. or killed by an inflating passenger’s
interior vehicle parts during a front airbag. Whenever possible,
collision or hard braking. Also, Infants larger children should sit in the back
children cannot be injured by an Never put a rear-facing child seat in seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
inflating front airbag when they ride the front seat of a vehicle equipped be properly restrained with a seat
in the back. with a passenger’s front airbag. If belt. (See page 50 for important
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back information about protecting larger
of the child seat with enough force children.)
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.

36
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

To remind you of the passenger’s Canadian Models


front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has

Driver and Passenger Safety


warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.

U.S. Models

37
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close Additional Safety Precautions
Children Attention Never hold an infant or child on
Your vehicle has two rows of back Many parents say they prefer to put your lap. If you are not wearing a
seats where children can be properly an infant or small child in the front seat belt in a crash, you could be
restrained. If you ever have to carry passenger seat so they can watch the thrown forward and crush the
a group of children, and a child must child, or because the child requires child against the dashboard or a
ride in front: attention. seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat from your arms and be seriously
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a hurt or killed.
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 57 ). attention to a child distracts the Never put a seat belt over yourself
driver from the important tasks of and a child. During a crash, the
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk. belt could press deep into the child
rear as possible (see page 13 ). and cause serious or fatal injuries.
If a child requires close physical
Have the child sit upright and well attention or frequent visual contact, Use childproof door locks to
back in the seat (see page 18 ). we strongly recommend that another prevent children from opening the
adult ride with the child in a back doors. This can prevent children
Make sure the seat belt is properly seat. The back seat is far safer for a from accidentally falling out (see
positioned and secured (see page child than the front. page 82 ).
16 ).

38
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Children − General Guidelines

Never let two children use the Lock all doors and tailgate when Keep vehicle keys and remote
same seat belt. If they do, they your vehicle is not in use. Children transmitters out of the reach of
could be very seriously injured in a who play in vehicles can children. Even very young
crash. accidentally get trapped inside. children learn how to unlock

Driver and Passenger Safety


Teach your children not to play in vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
Do not leave children alone in a or around vehicles. switch, and open the tailgate,
vehicle. Leaving children without which can lead to accidental injury
adult supervision is illegal in most or death.
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and small


children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition can accidentally set the
vehicle in motion, possibly injuring
themselves or others.

39
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-


facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving the seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking the
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat and the child is at least Or, it can interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.

40
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children

In any situation, we strongly Protecting Small Children Child Seat Placement


recommend that you install the child We strongly recommend placing a
seat directly behind the front forward-facing child seat in a back
passenger’s seat, move the seat as seat, not the front.

Driver and Passenger Safety


far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Even with advanced front airbags,
a smaller rear-facing child seat. which can automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page 33 ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Child Seat Type
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least one year old,
seat in the back seat, not the and who fits within the child seat
front. maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, we


recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.

CONTINUED

41
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Infants and Small Children

If it is necessary to put a forward-


facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as Placing a forward-facing child
possible, be sure the child seat is seat in the front seat can result
firmly secured to the vehicle, and the in serious injury or death if the
child is properly strapped in the seat. front airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-


facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.

42
Main Menu Table of Contents

Selecting a Child Seat

When buying a child seat, you need We also recommend selecting a Whatever type of seat you choose, to
to choose either a conventional child LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid, provide proper protection, a child
seat, or one designed for use with rather than a flexible, anchor (see seat should meet three
the Lower Anchors and Tethers for page 45 ). requirements:

Driver and Passenger Safety


Children (LATCH) system.
In seating positions and vehicles not 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
Conventional child seats must be equipped with LATCH, a LATCH- Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, compatible child seat can be installed Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
whereas LATCH-compatible seats using a seat belt. 213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two second- 2. The child seat should be of the
row seats. proper type and size to fit the child.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
Since LATCH-compatible child seats facing for small children.
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation, 3. The child seat should fit the
we recommend selecting this style. vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.

Before purchasing a conventional


child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position, or positions,
where the seat will be used.

43
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

After selecting a proper child seat, A child seat secured with a seat belt The following pages provide
and a good place to install the seat, should be installed as firmly as guidelines on how to properly install
there are three main steps in possible. However, it does not need a child seat. A forward-facing child
installing the seat: to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side seat is used in all examples, but the
movement can be expected and instructions are the same for a rear-
1. Properly secure the child seat to should not reduce the child seat’s facing child seat.
the vehicle. All child seats must be effectiveness.
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with If the child seat is not secure, try
the LATCH (Lower Anchors and installing it in a different seating
Tethers for Children) system. A position, or use a different style of
child whose seat is not properly child seat that can be firmly secured.
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash. 3. Secure the child in the back seat.
Make sure the child is properly
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly strapped in the child seat
secured. After installing a child according to the child seat maker’s
seat, push and pull the seat instructions. A child who is not
forward and from side to side to properly secured in a child seat
verify that it is secure. can be seriously injured in a crash.

44
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with MARKS


LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Driver and Passenger Safety


Tethers for Children) at the outer
second row seats.

The lower anchors are located


between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH. LOWER ANCHORS RIGID TYPE

The location of each lower anchor is To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. Place the child seat on the vehicle
indicated by a small button above the seat: seat, then attach the seat to the
anchor point. lower anchors according to the
1. Move the seat belt buckle or child seat maker’s instructions.
tongue away from the lower
anchors. Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
2. Make sure there are no objects shown above.
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED

45
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

TETHER STRAP HOOK 7. Push and pull the child seat


forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.

FLEXIBLE TYPE ANCHOR

Other LATCH-compatible seats have 5. Lift the head restraint (see page
a flexible-type connector as shown 88 ), then route the tether strap
above. through the legs of the head
restraint, over the seat-back,
4. Whatever type you have, follow making sure the strap is not
the child seat maker’s instructions twisted.
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
6. Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.

46
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/


Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the

Driver and Passenger Safety


vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in


all seating positions except the
driver’s have a locking mechanism
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.

1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
buckle.
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.

CONTINUED

47
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat with a


Tether
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the second or third row.

Since a tether can provide additional


security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.

4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side to side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or To deactivate the locking
push on the back of the seat while mechanism and remove a child seat,
pulling up on the belt. unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.

48
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat

Second Row Installation

Driver and Passenger Safety


TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Each second row seat has a tether 1. After properly securing the child 2. Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchorage point behind the seat- seat (see page 47 ), lift the head anchor, making sure the strap is
back. restraint, then route the tether not twisted.
strap over the seat-back.
3. Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.

CONTINUED

49
Main Menu Table of Contents

Installing a Child Seat, Protecting Larger Children

Third Row Installation Protecting Larger Children


When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit Allowing a larger child age 12 or
for a forward-facing child seat, the under to sit in front can result in
child should sit in a back seat on a injury or death if the passenger’s
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder front airbag inflates.
belt.
If a child must ride in front,
The following pages give move the vehicle seat as far
instructions on how to check proper back as possible, use a booster
seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat if needed, have the child
seat to use if one is needed, and sit up properly and wear the
important precautions for a child seat belt properly.
who must sit in front.
Each third row seat has a tether
anchorage point on the tailgate sill.

1. Select the anchor point you want


to use. Raise the cargo area floor,
and remove the cover with a small
flat-tipped screwdriver or
fingernail file.

2. Follow steps 1 and 2 of the second


row installation.

50
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children

Checking Seat Belt Fit 3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat
between the child’s neck and arm?

Driver and Passenger Safety


4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?

5. Will the child be able to stay


seated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all these


questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
properly fits a child, have the child facing child seat should ride in a
put on the seat belt, then ask back seat and use a booster seat
yourself: until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
1. Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend


comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED

51
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children

Some states also require children to A child may continue using a booster When Can a Larger Child Sit in
use a booster seat until they reach a seat until the tops of their ears are Front
given age or weight (e.g., 6 years or even with the top of the vehicle’s or The National Highway Traffic Safety
60 lbs). Be sure to check current booster’s seat-back. A child of this Administration and Transport
laws in the state or states where you height should be tall enough to use Canada recommend that all children
intend to drive. the lap/shoulder belt without a age 12 and under be properly
booster seat. restrained in the back seat.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select, If the passenger’s front airbag
make sure the booster seat meets inflates in a moderate to severe
federal safety standards and that you frontal collision, the airbag can cause
follow the booster seat maker’s serious injuries to a child who is
instructions. unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
If a child who uses a booster seat of position.
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far to the rear as possible, A side airbag also poses risks. If any
and be sure the child is wearing the part of a larger child’s body is in the
seat belt properly. path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.

52
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Larger Children

Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely Additional Safety Precautions
while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to: Do not let a child wear a seat belt
when a child can safely ride in front, across the neck. This could result in
there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual, serious neck injuries during a crash.

Driver and Passenger Safety


should consider. and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety Do not let a child put the shoulder
Physical Size information. part of a seat belt behind the back or
Physically, a child must be large under the arm. This could cause
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear- very serious injuries during a crash.
properly fit (see page 51 ). If the seat most position. It also increases the chance that the
belt does not fit properly, with or child will slide under the belt in a
without the child sitting on a booster, Have the child sit up straight, back crash and be injured.
the child should not sit in front. against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor. Two children should never use the
Maturity same seat belt. If they do, they could
To safely ride in front, a child must Check that the child’s seat belt is be very seriously injured in a crash.
be able to follow the rules, including properly and securely positioned.
sitting properly, and wearing the seat Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt properly throughout a ride. Supervise the child. Even mature belt. Devices intended to improve a
children sometimes need to be child’s comfort or reposition the
reminded to fasten the seat belts shoulder part of a seat belt can make
or sit properly. the belt less effective and increase
the chance of serious injury in a
crash.

53
Main Menu Table of Contents

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With the tailgate open, air flow can
carbon monoxide gas. You should pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
have no problem with carbon Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. interior and create a hazardous
monoxide entering the vehicle in Breathing it can cause condition. If you must drive with the
normal driving if you maintain your unconsciousness and even kill tailgate open, open all the windows
vehicle properly. you. and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or shown below.
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide. If you must sit in your parked vehicle
The vehicle is raised for an oil with the engine running, even in an
change. unconfined area, adjust the heating
You notice a change in the sound High levels of carbon monoxide can and cooling system/climate control
of the exhaust. collect rapidly in enclosed areas, system as follows:
The vehicle was in an accident such as a garage. Do not run the
that may have damaged the engine with the garage door closed. 1. Select the fresh air mode.
underside. Even with the door open, run the 2. Select the mode.
engine only long enough to move the 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
vehicle out of the garage. 4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.

54
Main Menu Table of Contents

Safety Labels

These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD


shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.

Driver and Passenger Safety


If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which is removed by
the owner), contact your Acura
dealer for a replacement.
HOOD

RADIATOR CAP

BATTERY LABEL CONTINUED

55
Main Menu Table of Contents

Safety Labels

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS


U.S. models
On vehicles with side curtain airbags
U.S. models Canadian models

Canadian models

56
Main Menu

Instruments and Controls

This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 58 Mirrors .............................................. 95
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ............................. 59 Driving Position Memory
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Indicators ..................... 60 System ........................................... 97
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 68 Interior Lights .................................. 99
controls are within easy reach. Controls Near the Steering Interior Convenience Items .......... 101
Wheel ............................................ 70 Beverage Holders ...................... 102

Instruments and Controls


Windshield Wipers and Console Compartment .............. 102
Washers .................................... 71 Glove Box ................................... 102
Rear Window Wiper and Rear Compartment .................... 103
Washer ...................................... 73 Cargo Hooks .............................. 103
Turn Signal and Headlights............ 74 Sun Visor .................................... 103
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 76 Vanity Mirror ............................. 103
Hazard Warning Button .................. 76 Accessory Power Sockets......... 104
Rear Window Defogger .................. 77
Fog Light .......................................... 77
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 78
Keys ................................................... 79
Immobilizer System......................... 80
Ignition Switch ................................. 81
Door Locks ....................................... 82
Remote Transmitter ........................ 83
Seats .................................................. 86
Seat Heaters ..................................... 91
Power Windows ............................... 92
Moonroof .......................................... 93
Parking Brake .................................. 94

57
Main Menu Table of Contents

Control Locations

INSTRUMENT PANEL (P.59) MOONROOF (P.93) CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (P.106)


GAUGES (P.68)

AUDIO SYSTEM
POWER DOOR LOCK (P.112)
SWITCHES
(P.82)

MIRROR GLOVE BOX


CONTROLS (P.102)
(P.96)

POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.92)

HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.188)

FUEL FILL DOOR PARKING BRAKE REAR A/C CONTROL ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
RELEASE PEDAL (P.111) (P.104)
(P.187) (P.94)

58
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR CRUISE CONTROL SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT


LAMP (P.273) INDICATOR SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.60)
(P.63)
LOW OIL PRESSURE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.60) HIGH BEAM INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.61)
(P.63)

Instruments and Controls


ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.61)
WASHER LEVEL
INDICATOR (P.63)
LIGHTS ON
INDICATOR (P.64)
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
(P.60)
SEAT BELT
CHARGING SYSTEM REMINDER
INDICATOR (P.60) INDICATOR (P.60)
TPMS INDICATOR (P.66)
MAINTENANCE DOOR AND TAILGATE LOW TIRE PRESSURE
REQUIRED OPEN MONITOR (P.62)/ INDICATOR (P.66)
INDICATOR (P.67) TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR (P.66) PARKING
BRAKE AND
VTM-4 INDICATOR (P.64) LOW FUEL INDICATOR (P.63) BRAKE LAMP BRAKE
INDICATOR (P.62) SYSTEM
A/T TEMPERATURE VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST INDICATOR*
SYSTEM (VSA) INDICATOR (P.65) VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR (P.64) INDICATOR (P.65) (P.61)

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
CONTINUED
59
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

The instrument panel has many Malfunction Indicator airbags or automatic seat belt
indicators to give you important Lamp tensioners. This indicator will also
information about your vehicle. See page 273 . alert you to a potential problem with
your side airbags, passenger’s side
Seat Belt Reminder Low Oil Pressure airbag automatic cutoff system,
Indicator Indicator driver’s seat position sensor, front
This indicator comes on when you The engine can be severely damaged passenger’s weight sensors, or side
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). It if this indicator flashes or stays on curtain airbags. For complete
reminds you and your passengers to when the engine is running. For information, see page 32 .
fasten your seat belts. A beeper also more information, see page 272 .
sounds if you have not fastened your U.S. Canada
seat belt. Charging System Side Airbag Off
Indicator Indicator
If you turn the ignition switch to ON If this indicator comes on when the This indicator comes on for a few
(II) before fastening your seat belt, engine is running, the battery is not seconds when you turn the ignition
the beeper sounds and the indicator being charged. For more information, switch to ON (II). If it comes on at
flashes. If you do not fasten your see page 272 . any other time, it indicates that the
seat belt before the beeper stops, the passenger’s side airbag has
indicator stops flashing but remains Supplemental Restraint automatically shut off. For more
on. System Indicator information, see page 32 .
This indicator comes on for a few
If you continue driving without seconds when you turn the ignition
fastening your seat belt, the beeper switch to ON (II), see page 32 for
sounds and the indicator flashes more information. If it comes on at
again at regular intervals. any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front

60
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

U.S. Canada Anti-lock Brake System Immobilizer System


(ABS) Indicator Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator comes on for a few
Parking Brake and Brake System a few seconds when you turn the seconds when you turn the ignition
Indicator ignition switch to ON (II), and when switch to ON (II). It will go off if you
This indicator has two functions: the ignition switch is turned to have inserted a properly-coded

Instruments and Controls


START (III). If it comes on at any ignition key. If it is not a properly-
1. This indicator comes on when you other time, there is a problem in the coded key, the indicator will blink
turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ABS. If this happens, have your and the engine will not start (see
It is a reminder to check the vehicle checked by your dealer. With page 80 ).
parking brake. A beeper sounds if the indicator on, your vehicle still
you try to drive with the parking has normal braking ability but no This indicator also blinks several
brake not fully released. Driving anti-lock. For more information, see times when you turn the ignition
with the parking brake not fully page 209 . switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
released can damage the brakes (I) or LOCK (0).
and tires.

2. If the indicator remains on after


you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page 274 .

61
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Turn Signal and Brake Lamp Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Monitor
Hazard Warning
Indicators If a brake light does not work, the
The left or right turn signal indicator BRAKE LAMP indicator comes on
blinks when you signal a lane change when you push the brake pedal with
or turn. If the indicator does not the ignition switch to ON (II).
blink or blinks rapidly, it usually
means one of the turn signal bulbs is A burned out brake light is a hazard
burned out (see page 246 ). Replace when drivers behind you cannot tell The appropriate indicator comes on
the bulb as soon as possible, since you are braking. Replace the bulb as in this display if the tailgate or any
other drivers cannot see that you are soon as possible (see page 247 ). door is not closed tightly.
signaling.
All of the indicators in the monitor
When you press the Hazard Warning display come on for a few seconds
button, both turn signal lights blink. when you turn the ignition switch to
All turn signals on the outside of the ON (II).
vehicle should flash.

62
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

‘‘Daytime Running High Beam Indicator Washer Level Indicator


Lights’’ Indicator
Canadian models only This indicator comes on with the This indicator comes on when the
This indicator comes on when you high beam headlights. See page washer fluid level is low. Add washer
turn the ignition switch to ON (II) 74 for information on the headlight fluid when you see this indicator
with the headlight switch off and the controls. comes on (see page 241 ).

Instruments and Controls


parking brake set. It should go off if
you turn on the headlights or release On Canadian models, this indicator
the parking brake. If it comes on at comes on with reduced brightness
any other time, it means there is a when the Daytime Running Lights
problem with the DRL. There may (DRL) are on (see page 76 ).
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights. Low Fuel Indicator

Cruise Control Indicator This indicator comes on as a


reminder that you must refuel soon.
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
146 for information on operating the
cruise control.

63
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Lights On Indicator A/T Temperature VTM-4 Indicator


U.S. models only Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the This indicator monitors the This indicator normally comes on for
exterior lights are on. It comes on temperature of the automatic a few seconds when you turn the
when the light switch is in either the transmission fluid. The indicator ignition switch to ON (II). If this
or position. This indicator should come on for a few seconds indicator comes on at any other time,
will also come on when the light when you turn the ignition switch to there is a problem in the 4WD
switch is in AUTO and the lights ON (II). If it comes on while driving, system. Take the vehicle to your
turn on automatically. it indicates the transmission fluid dealer to have it checked.
temperature is too high. Pull to the
U.S. Models except Touring side of the road when it is safe, shift If the indicator blinks while driving,
If you turn the ignition switch to to Park, and let the engine idle until pull to the side of the road when it is
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) the indicator goes out. safe, shift to Park, and let the engine
without turning off the light switch, idle until the indicator goes out.
this indicator will remain on. A
reminder chime will also sound when
you open the driver’s door. Continuing to drive with the A/T
Temperature indicator on may cause Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
serious damage to the transmission. indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.

64
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator


(VSA) System Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). ignition switch to ON (II). For more
information, see page 211 .

Instruments and Controls


If it comes on and stays on at any
other time, or it does not come on This indicator has three functions:
when you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), there is a problem with the 1. It comes on as a reminder that you
VSA system. Take your vehicle to a have turned off the Vehicle
dealer to have it checked. Without Stability Assist (VSA) system.
VSA, your vehicle still has normal
driving ability, but will not have VSA 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
traction and stability enhancement. page 211 ).
See page 211 for more information
on the VSA system. 3. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.

65
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Pressure Monitoring


Indicator System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for The appropriate tire indicator will This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the come on along with the Low Tire a few seconds when you turn the
ignition to ON (II). Pressure Indicator if a tire is ignition to ON (II).
If it comes on while driving, it extremely under inflated or has
indicates that one or more of your suddenly lost pressure. See Low Tire If this indicator comes on and stays
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on Pressure Indicator for what to do if on at any other time, or it does not
pressure. this indicator comes on. come on when you turn the ignition
If this happens, pull to the side of the switch to ON (II), there is a problem
road when it is safe, check which tire with the TPMS. With this indicator
has lost the pressure on the Tire on, the low tire pressure indicator
Pressure Monitor, and determine the and the tire pressure monitor will not
cause. If it is because of a flat tire, come on when a tire loses pressure.
replace the flat tire with the compact Take the vehicle to your dealer to
spare (see page 261 ), and have the have the system checked.
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 274 ). Refer to page
205 for more information.

66
Main Menu Table of Contents

Instrument Panel Indicators

Maintenance Required Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and SELECT BUTTON
Indicator 7,500 miles (12,000 km), this
This indicator reminds you that it is indicator will light for 2 seconds
time to take your vehicle in for when you first turn the ignition
scheduled maintenance. switch to ON (II), and then flash for
Refer to the maintenance schedule 10 seconds.

Instruments and Controls


for normal and severe driving
conditions on pages 231and 232. If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000
km) without having the scheduled
For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km) maintenance performed, this
after the Maintenance Required indicator will remain on as a constant
Indicator is reset, it will come on for reminder. RESET BUTTON
2 seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to ON (II). Your dealer will reset this indicator 1. Turn off the engine.
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is 2. Press and hold the Select and
done by someone other than your Reset buttons on the instrument
Acura dealer, reset the indicator as panel, then turn the ignition switch
follows. to ON (II).

3. Hold the buttons for


approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator goes off.

67
Main Menu Table of Contents

Gauges

Odometer
This shows the total distance your
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATURE vehicle has been driven. It measures
GAUGE miles in U.S. models and kilometers
in the Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.

Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
TRIP METER returns to the bottom after you turn
SELECT off the ignition.
BUTTON

TRIP METER
Avoid driving with an extremely low
ODOMETER TRIP METER RESET f uel level. Running out of f uel could
BUTTON
cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.

68
Main Menu Table of Contents

Gauges

Trip Meter There are two trip meters: Trip A Temperature Gauge
and Trip B. Switch between these This shows the temperature of the
SELECT BUTTON displays by pressing the Select engine’s coolant. During normal
button repeatedly. Each trip meter operation, the pointer should rise to
works independently, so you can about the middle of the gauge. In
keep track of two different distances. severe driving conditions, the pointer

Instruments and Controls


When you turn the ignition switch to may rise to the upper white mark. If
ON (II), what you last selected is it reaches the red (Hot) mark, pull
displayed. safely to the side of the road. Turn to
page 270 for instructions and
To reset a trip meter, display it, and precautions on checking the engine’s
then press and hold the Reset button cooling system.
RESET BUTTON until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
Both trip meters will reset if the
This meter shows the number of vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) disconnected.
driven since you last reset it.

69
Main Menu Table of Contents

Controls Near the Steering Wheel

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS INSTRUMENT PANEL VTM-4 LOCK


(P.74) BRIGHTNESS (P.204)
(P.76)

REAR WINDOW
FOG LIGHTS DEFOGGER
(P.77) (P.77)

CRUISE CONTROL
(P.146)

VEHICLE STABILITY HAZARD WARNING


ASSIST SYSTEM OFF BUTTON
SWITCH (P.76)
(P.212) HORN*

REMOTE AUDIO CRUISE CONTROL PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR


CONTROLS (P.146) (P.33)
(P.130)
STEERING WHEEL ADJUSTMENT WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.78) (P.71)


To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘Acura’’ logo.
70
Main Menu Table of Contents

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Turn the rotary switch at the end of MIST: The wipers run at high speed
the lever or push down or pull the until you release the lever.
lever to select a position.
Windshield Washer: Pull the wiper
OFF: The wipers are not activated. control lever toward you and
hold it. The washers spray

Instruments and Controls


INT: The length of the wiper until you release the lever.
interval is varied The wipers run at low speed,
automatically according to the then complete one more
vehicle’s speed. sweep after you release the
lever.
Vary the delay by turning the
INT TIME ring. If you turn it
1. OFF to the shortest delay, the
2. INT : Intermittent wipers will change to low
3. : Low speed speed operation when the
4. : High speed vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph
5. MIST (20 km/h).
6. Windshield Washers
: The wipers run at low speed.

: The wipers run at high speed.

71
Main Menu Table of Contents

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Automatic Intermittent Wipers When the system senses rainfall, it


Touring Model turns on the windshield wipers and
varies their speed (intermittent, low
speed, or high speed) depending on
how hard it is raining.

When the rotary switch is in the


(low speed) or (high speed)
position, the windshield wipers run
at that speed. Automatic sensing is
disabled.

The automatic intermittent wiper You can adjust the sensitivity of the
system senses rainfall and system by turning the AUTO SENS
automatically turns on the ring next to the rotary switch.
windshield wipers. To enable sensing,
turn the rotary switch at the end of
the wiper lever to AUTO.

72
Main Menu Table of Contents

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

Do not put the wiper switch in AUTO


RAINFALL SENSOR when driving through a car wash. Turn
of f this system when not in use.

Instruments and Controls


The rear window wiper switch is
The rainfall sensor is located in the located next to the windshield wiper
windshield near the rearview mirror. switch.
If the sensor is covered with mud, oil,
dust, etc., the wipers may not 1. OFF
operate properly or may operate 2. ON
unexpectedly. 3. Turn and hold to use the wiper
and washer.

73
Main Menu Table of Contents

Turn Signal, Headlights

Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal − Push down on the When the light switch is in either of
left lever to signal a left turn and up these positions, the Lights On
to signal a right turn. To signal a lane indicator comes on as a reminder.
change, push lightly on the lever and This light remains on if you leave the
hold it. The lever will return to light switch on and turn the ignition
center when you release it or switch to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK
complete a turn. (0).

Headlights − Turning the switch to High Beams − To turn on, pull the
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the lever back until you hear a click. The
parking lights, taillights, instrument blue high beam indicator will come
panel lights, side-marker lights, and on (see page 63 ). Pull it back again
rear license plate lights. to return to low beams.

1. Turn signal To flash the high beams, pull the


2. Off Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’ lever back lightly, then release it.
3. Parking and indicator lights position turns on the headlights. If The high beams will stay on as long
4. AUTO you leave the lights on with the key as you hold the lever back.
5. Headlights on removed from the ignition switch,
6. High beams you will hear a reminder chime when
7. Flash high beams you open the driver’s door.

74
Main Menu Table of Contents

Headlights

AUTO − The Automatic Lighting The lights will remain on when you
feature turns on the headlights, all turn off the ignition switch. They will
other exterior lights, and the turn off automatically when you open
instrument panel lights when it the driver’s door. To turn them on
senses low ambient light. again, either turn the ignition switch
to ON (II) or turn the light switch to

Instruments and Controls


To turn on automatic lighting, turn .
the light switch to AUTO at any time.
The lights will come on automatically Even with the automatic lighting
when the outside light level becomes feature turned on, we recommend
low (at dusk, for example). The that you turn on the lights manually
lights on indicator comes on as a when driving at night or in a dense LIGHT SENSOR
reminder. The lights and indicator fog, or when you enter dark areas
will turn off automatically when the such as long tunnels or parking The automatic lighting feature is
system senses high ambient light. structures. controlled by a sensor located on top
of the dashboard. Do not cover this
Do not leave the light switch in sensor or spill liquids on it.
AUTO if you will not be driving the
vehicle for an extended period (a
week or more). You should also turn
off the lights if you plan to leave the
engine idling or the engine off for a
long time.

75
Main Menu Table of Contents

Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning Button

Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard Warning Button


Canadian Models
With the headlight switch off, the INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL DIAL
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normal


operation when you turn them on
with the switch.

The dial on the instrument panel Push the red button to the right of
controls the brightness of the the display to turn on the hazard
instrument panel lights, the blue warning lights (four-way flashers).
lighting in the upper console and the This causes all four outside turn
front foot wells. signals and both indicators in the
instrument panel to flash. Use the
hazard warning lights if you need to
park in a dangerous area near heavy
traffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

76
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Window Defogger, Fog Lights

Rear Window Defogger Make sure the rear window is clear Fog Lights
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.

The defogger wires on the inside of


the rear window can be accidentally

Instruments and Controls


damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side to side.

The rear window defogger will clear Turn the fog lights on and off by
fog, frost, and thin ice from the pressing the button. The indicator in
window. Push the defogger button to the button lights to show the fog
turn it on and off. The indicator in lights are on.
the button lights to show the
defogger is on. If you do not turn it You can use the fog lights only when
off, the defogger will shut itself off the headlights are on low beam.
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts They will go off when you turn the
off when you turn off the ignition. headlights off or onto high beam.
You have to turn it on again when
you restart the vehicle.

77
Main Menu Table of Contents

Steering Wheel Adjustment

Make any steering wheel adjustment 3. Push the lever up to lock the
before you start driving. steering wheel in position.

4. Make sure you have securely


locked the steering wheel in place
Adjusting the steering wheel by trying to move it up and down.
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel only


when the vehicle is stopped.
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.

2. Move the steering wheel so it


points toward your chest, not
toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.

78
Main Menu Table of Contents

Keys

You should have received a key These keys contain electronic


KEY MASTER VALET KEY
NUMBER KEYS (GRAY) number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
TAG (BLACK) need this key number if you ever Immobilizer System. They will not
have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Acura-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.

Instruments and Controls


Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavy


objects on them.

The master key fits all the locks on Keep the keys away from liquids.
your vehicle. The valet key works If they get wet, dry them
only in the ignition and the door immediately with a soft cloth.
locks. You can keep the glove box
locked when you leave your vehicle The keys do not contain batteries.
and the valet key at a parking facility. Do not try to take them apart.

79
Main Menu Table of Contents

Immobilizer System

The Immobilizer System protects The system may not recognize your As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an key’s coding if another immobilizer This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other key or other metal object (i.e. key FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine will not fob) is near the ignition switch when following two conditions: (1) This device
start. you insert the key. may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
When you turn the ignition switch to If the system repeatedly does not interference received, including
ON (II), the Immobilizer System recognize the coding of your key, interference that may cause undesired
indicator should come on for a few contact your dealer. operation.
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system Do not attempt to alter this system Changes or modifications not expressly
does not recognize the coding of the or add other devices to it. Electrical approved by the party responsible for
key. Turn the ignition switch to problems could result that may make compliance could void the user’s
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert your vehicle undriveable. authority to operate the equipment.
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again. If you have lost your key and you This device complies with Industry
cannot start the engine, contact your Canada Standard RSS-210.
dealer. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

80
Main Menu Table of Contents

Ignition Switch

LOCK (0) − You can insert or START (III) − Use this position
remove the key only in this position. only to start the engine. The switch
To turn the key, the shift lever must returns to ON (II) when you let go of
be in Park, and you must push the the key.
key in slightly.
You will hear a reminder beeper if

Instruments and Controls


If the front wheels are turned, the you leave the key in the ignition
anti-theft lock may make it difficult switch in the LOCK (0) or
to turn the key. Firmly turn the ACCESSORY (I) position and open
steering wheel to the left or right as the driver’s door. Remove the key to
you turn the key. turn off the beeper.

ACCESSORY (I) − You can The shift lever must be in Park


The ignition switch has four operate the audio system and the before you can remove the key from
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY accessory power sockets in this the ignition switch.
(I), ON (II), and START (III). position.

ON (II) − This is the normal key


position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from ACCESSORY
(I) to ON (II).

81
Main Menu Table of Contents

Door Locks

MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH driver’s door from the outside, turn Childproof Door Locks
the key and release it. If you turn
and hold it, all doors and the tailgate
unlock.

Lockout Prevention
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
lock switches are disabled. They are
not disabled if the driver’s door is
closed. Pushing the switch down on
LOCK TAB the open passenger’s door will lock
all doors and the tailgate. LOCK LEVER
To lock all doors and the tailgate,
press the master door lock switch on Tailgate The childproof door locks are
either front door, press the lock tab To open the tailgate, pull the handle, designed to prevent children seated
down on the driver’s door, or use the then lift up. To close the tailgate, use in the rear from accidentally opening
key on the outside lock on the driver’s the inner handle to pull it down, then the rear doors. Each rear door has a
door. press down on the back edge. lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
Pressing up on either master door Keep the tailgate closed at all times cannot be opened from the inside
lock switch will unlock all of the while driving to avoid damaging the regardless of the position of the lock
doors and the tailgate. tailgate and to prevent exhaust gas tab. To open the door, pull the lock
from getting into the interior. See tab up, and use the outside door
The lock tab on any door locks and Carbon Monoxide Hazard on page handle.
unlocks that door. To unlock the 54 .

82
Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter

UNLOCK − Press this button once PANIC − Press and hold this
LED LOCK to unlock the driver’s door. Push it button for about 1 second to attract
BUTTON
twice to unlock the other doors. attention; the horn will sound and
Some exterior and interior lights will the exterior lights will flash for about
flash twice when you push the 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
button. If you do not open any door press any other button on the remote

Instruments and Controls


or the tailgate within 30 seconds, transmitter or turn the ignition
they will automatically relock. switch to ON (II).

When you press the UNLOCK Remote Transmitter Care


UNLOCK PANIC button, the front and rear individual Avoid dropping or throwing the
BUTTON BUTTON map lights and the cargo area light, transmitter.
depending on their switch positions, Protect the transmitter from
LOCK − Press this button once to will come on (see page 96 ). If you extreme temperature.
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some do not open any door or the tailgate, Do not immerse the transmitter in
exterior and interior lights will flash. the lights stay on for about 30 any liquid.
When you push LOCK twice within 5 seconds, then go out. If you relock If you lose a transmitter, the
seconds, you will hear a beep to the doors and the tailgate with the replacement needs to be
verify that the doors and tailgate are remote transmitter before 30 reprogrammed by your dealer.
locked and the security system has seconds have elapsed, the lights will
set. This button does not work if any go off immediately.
door or tailgate is not fully closed.

83
Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter

Replacing the Transmitter As required by the FCC:


Battery This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly


approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

If it takes several pushes on the To replace the battery, place a cloth This device complies with Industry
button to lock or unlock the doors on the edge of the transmitter and Canada Standard RSS-210.
and the tailgate, replace the battery remove the upper half by carefully Operation is subject to the following two
as soon as possible. prying on the edge with a small flat- conditions: (1) this device may not cause
Battery type: CR2025 tip screwdriver. Remove the old interference, and (2) this device must
battery and insert a new battery with accept any interference that may cause
the + side facing up. Snap the two undesired operation of the device.
halves of the transmitter case back
together.

84
Main Menu Table of Contents

Remote Transmitter

Recalling a Memorized Driving when the movement is complete. You can turn the driving position
Position memory activation off and on. To
On Touring Model If the seat and mirrors are already in turn it off, press and hold the LOCK
the proper positions, you will hear and UNLOCK buttons at the same
With Memory 1 With Memory 2 three beeps when you open the door. time for about one second. The LED
in the remote transmitter will blink

Instruments and Controls


The driving position memory twice. Then release the buttons.
activated (Memory 1, Memory 2) is
shown on the back of each To turn it back on, repeat this
transmitter. Make sure you store procedure. The LED will come on
your desired driving position in the for one second to indicate the
memory that is activated by the feature has been turned on.
transmitter you normally carry.

Each remote transmitter will also


activate the Driving Position
Memory System (see page 97 ).
When you unlock and open the
driver’s door with the remote
transmitter, you will hear a beep.
The driver’s seat, except power
lumbar, and outside mirrors move to
the positions stored in that memory
location. You will hear two beeps

85
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Front Seat Power Adjustments


See pages 13 − 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.

The controls for the power


adjustable front seats are on the
outside edge of each seat bottom.
You can adjust the seats with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.

On the Touring Package, the Moves the seat forward Adjusts the seat-back
passenger seat has the same and backward. angle forward or
adjustments as the driver’s seat but backward.
without any lumbar adjustment.
Moves the front of the Increases or decreases
seat up or down and the the lumbar support.
rear of the seat up or (Driver’s Touring seat
down. only)

Raises or lowers the seat.

86
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Passenger Manual Seat Driver’s Manual Lumbar Support


Adjustments
Without Touring Package
See pages 13 − 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.

Instruments and Controls


To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under Without Touring Package
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move Vary the lumbar support by moving
the seat to the desired position and the lever on the right side of the
release the lever. Try to move the seat-back. Move the lever forward or
seat to make sure it is locked in backward to adjust the lumbar
Make all seat adjustments before position. support through its full range.
you start driving.

To change the seat-back angle of the


front seats, pull up on the lever on
the outside of the seat bottom.

87
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Head Restraints The head restraints adjust for height. Detachable Seat Belt Anchors
See page 15 for important safety You need both hands to adjust the
information and a warning about how to restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it SMALL LATCH PLATE
properly position the head restraints. while driving. To raise it, pull upward.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways and push
the restraint down.

Using a seat belt with the


detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious TRIANGULAR MARKS
injury or death in a crash.
To unlatch the detachable anchor,
RELEASE BUTTON Before using the seat belt, insert a key into the slot on the side
make sure the detachable of the small buckle. Line up the
Your vehicle is equipped with head anchor is correctly latched. triangle marks on the plate and
restraints in all seating positions to buckle when reattaching the belt and
help protect you and your buckle.
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.

88
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Adjusting the Second Seat Folding the Second Seat


The left and right halves can be
Using a seat belt with the folded up separately.
detachable anchor unlatched
increases the chance of serious 1. If you are folding the left half of
injury or death in a crash. the seat, use the ignition key to

Instruments and Controls


release the center seat belt from
Before using the seat belt, the detachable anchor. Allow the
make sure the detachable seat belt to retract into the roof.
anchor is correctly latched. Insert the latch plate into the roof
holder.

HANDLE 2. Lower the head restraint to its


lowest position.
To change the seat-back angle of the
seats in the second row, pull up on 3. Pull up the handle on the outside
the handle on the outside of the seat- of the seat-back.
back.
4. Fold the seat-back forward.

Reverse this procedure to return the


seat to the upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked securely
before driving.

89
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats

Third Row Access Adjusting the Third Row Seat

THIRD
RELEASE LEVER SEAT HANDLE

To get into the third row seats, pull Pull on the handle on the back of the 2. Store the head restraints in the
up the lever on the side of the seat-back, move the seat-back to the storage compartment. Make sure
passenger’s side second row seat- desired position, and release the the head restraints are face up
back. The seat-back will tilt forward, handle. Let the seat-back latch in the (storing them face down can
and the seat will slide forward. new position. damage the compartment or the
headrests), then insert the shafts
After you return the seat-back to the Folding the Third Row Seat into the holes in the sides of the
upright position, push the whole seat 1. Remove the head restraints by storage compartment.
backwards until it latches. Make pushing the release buttons and
sure the seat is fully latched before pulling the restraints out. 3. Use the ignition key to release the
sitting in it. seat belt from the detachable
anchor.

90
Main Menu Table of Contents

Seats, Seat Heaters

NOTE: To fold the third row seat, Seat Heaters In HI, the heater turns off when the
the second row must be folded down seat gets warm, and turns back on
or completely up right. SEAT HEATERS after the seat’s temperature drops.

4. Unlock the seat-back by pulling In LO, the heater runs continuously.


the handle. Push the seat-back It does not cycle with temperature

Instruments and Controls


forward. changes.

Make sure the outer shoulder belts Follow these precautions when using
are positioned on each hook the seat heaters:
whenever the third seat is folded.
Use the HI setting only to heat the
Reverse this procedure to return the seats quickly, because it draws
seat to the upright position. Make large amounts of current from the
sure the seat is locked securely Both front seats are equipped with battery.
before driving. Reinstall the head seat heaters. The passenger seat is
restraints. Reconnect the seat belts only heated in the seat bottom If the engine is left idling for an
to the detachable anchors. because of the side airbag off system. extended period, do not use the
The ignition switch must be in the seat heaters, even on the LO
Make sure all items in the cargo area ON (II) position to use them. Push setting. It can weaken the battery,
are secured. Loose items can fly the front of the switch, HI, to rapidly causing hard starting.
forward and cause injury if you have heat up the seat. After the seat
to brake hard. See Carrying Cargo reaches a comfortable temperature,
on page 193 . select LO by pushing the back of the
switch. This will keep the seat warm.

91
Main Menu Table of Contents

Power Windows

DRIVER’S WINDOW MAIN SWITCH The windows will operate for up to AUTO − To open/close the driver’s
SWITCH 10 minutes after you turn off the window, push the window switch
ignition switch. Opening either front firmly down or up to the second
door cancels this function. detent, and release it. The window
will automatically go up or down all
the way. To stop the window, pull/
push on the window switch briefly.
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can If the MAIN switch is OFF, the
cause serious injury. passenger windows cannot be raised
or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch
Make sure your passengers are off when you have children in the
away from the windows before vehicle so they do not injure
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) closing them. themselves by operating the
to raise or lower any window. To windows unintentionally.
open the window, push the switch
down and hold it. Release the switch
when you want the window to stop.
Pull back on the switch and hold it to
close the window.

92
Main Menu Table of Contents

Power Windows, Moonroof

AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s If your vehicle’s battery is Moonroof


window senses any obstacle while it disconnected or goes dead, or the
is closing automatically, it will driver’s window fuse is removed, the
reverse direction and then stop. To AUTO function will be disabled. The
close the window, remove the power window system needs to be
obstacle, then use the window switch reset after reconnecting the battery

Instruments and Controls


again. or installing the fuse.

Auto reverse stops sensing when the 1. Start the engine. Push down and
window is almost closed. You should hold the driver’s window switch
always check that all passengers and until the window is fully open.
objects are away from the window
before closing it. 2. Pull and hold the driver’s window MOONROOF SWITCH
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch To open the moonroof, pull back the
for a second or two more. moonroof switch firmly.

If the power windows do not operate To close the moonroof fully, push
properly after resetting, have your the switch forward.
vehicle checked by your dealer.

CONTINUED

93
Main Menu Table of Contents

Moonroof, Parking Brake

To tilt the moonroof up, press the You can still open and close the Parking Brake
button in. To closed it, push the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
button forward. Make sure everyone’s you turn off the ignition. Opening
hands are away from the moonroof either front door cancels this
before opening or closing it. function.

Opening or closing the If you try to open the moonroof in


moonroof on someone’s hands below-f reezing temperatures, or when
or fingers can cause serious it is covered with snow or ice, you can
injury. damage the moonroof panel or its
motor. PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof To apply the parking brake, push the
before opening or closing it. pedal down with your foot. To
release it, push on the pedal again.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
with the engine running (see page
61 ).

94
Main Menu Table of Contents

Parking Brake, Mirrors

Mirrors The inside mirror can automatically


darken to reduce glare. To turn on
Driving the vehicle with the parking SENSOR INDICATOR this feature, press the button on the
brake applied can damage the rear bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound indicator comes on as a reminder.
if the vehicle is put into gear with the When it is on, the mirror darkens

Instruments and Controls


parking brake on. when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this sensing.

AUTO SWITCH

Keep the inside and outside mirrors


clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.

95
Main Menu Table of Contents

Mirrors

Adjusting the Power Mirrors 4. When you finish, move the


selector switch to the center (off)
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH position. This turns the HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.

Touring model only


With the selector switch in the
center (off) position, the passenger’s
side mirror will pivot downward
slightly when you shift the
transmission into Reverse. This
SELECTOR SWITCH gives you a better view of the side of
the vehicle while parallel parking.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The mirror returns to its original The outside mirrors are heated to
position when you take the remove fog and frost. With the
2. Move the selector switch to L transmission out of reverse. ignition switch in the ON (II)
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s position, turn on the heaters by
side). Turn this feature off by leaving the pressing the button. The indicator in
selector switch in the left or right the button comes on as a reminder.
3. Push the appropriate edge of the position. Press the button again to turn the
adjustment switch to move the heaters off.
mirror right, left, up, or down.

96
Main Menu Table of Contents

Driving Position Memory System

Touring Model Storing a Driving Position in MEMO BUTTON


Your vehicle has a memory feature Memory
for the driver’s seat and outside Store a driving position only when
mirror positions. the vehicle is parked.

Seat, except for power lumbar, and 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Instruments and Controls


outside mirror positions, can be You cannot add a new driving
stored in separate memories. You position in the memory unless the
select a memorized position by ignition switch is in the ON (II)
pushing the appropriate button or position. You can recall a
using the appropriate remote memorized position with the
transmitter (Memory 1 or ignition switch in any position. MEMORY BUTTONS
Memory 2).
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable 3. Press and release the MEMO
position (see page 86 ). button on the control panel. You
Adjust the outside mirrors for best will hear a beep. Immediately
visibility (see page 96 ). press and hold one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two
beeps. The indicator in the
memory button will come on. The
current positions of the driver’s
seat and outside mirrors are now
stored.

CONTINUED

97
Main Menu Table of Contents

Driving Position Memory System

Doing any of the following after Selecting a Memorized Position To stop the system’s automatic
pressing the MEMO button will To select a memorized position, do adjustment, do any of these actions:
cancel the storing procedure. this:
Press any button on the control
Not pressing a memory button 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked. panel: MEMO, 1, or 2.
within 5 seconds. Push any of the adjustment
2. Press the desired memory button switches for the seat.
Readjusting the seat position. (1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then Shift out of Park.
release the button. Adjust the outside mirrors.
Readjusting the outside mirror
position. The system will move the seat and If desired, you can use the
outside mirrors to the memorized adjustment switches to change the
Each memory button stores only one positions. The indicator in the positions of the seat or outside
driving position. Storing a new selected memory button will flash mirrors after they are in their
position erases the previous setting during movement. When the memorized position. If you change
stored in that button’s memory. If adjustments are complete, you will the memorized position, the
you want to add a new position while hear two beeps, and the indicator will indicator in the memory button will
retaining the current one, use the remain on. go out. To keep this driving position
other memory button. for later use, you must store it in the
driving position memory.

98
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Lights

Light Control Switch When the switch is in the Door With any door or the tailgate left
Activated position: open, the lights stay on about 3
DOOR ACTIVATED POSITION minutes, then go out.
The individual map lights come on
OFF when any door or the tailgate is When the light control switch is in the
opened, or when the remote ON position:

Instruments and Controls


transmitter is used to unlock the
doors. When the doors and the All the individual map lights and
tailgate are closed, each light can footwell lights come on and stay
be turned on and off by pushing on as long as the switch remains in
the lens. the ON position.

ON The cargo area (3rd row) light The cargo (3rd row) area light
comes on when any door or the comes on if the switch is in the
When this switch is in the OFF position: tailgate is opened if the switch in door activated position.
the light is in the door activated
None of the lights come on when a position. When the doors and the
door or the tailgate is opened. tailgate are closed, the cargo area
light can be turned on with the
The map lights in the front can be switch in the light.
turned on and off by pushing each
lens, the second row map lights The lights go out about 6 seconds
cannot. after all the doors and the tailgate
are closed.

99
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Lights

Individual Map Lights Individual Interior Lights Cargo Area Light


Turn on the front row individual map The courtesy lights in all four doors
lights by pushing the lens. Push the come on when you open any door. DOOR ACTIVATED
lens again to turn it off. With the The light around the ignition switch
light control switch in the door only come on when you open the
activated position, the second row driver’s door. After you close the
map lights can be turned on by door, the ignition switch light stays
pushing the lens. Push the lens again on for several seconds.
to turn it off.

Tailgate Light
The light in the tailgate has an on-off
switch to control if the light comes
on when the tailgate is opened.
The light control switch must be in
either the ON or DOOR ACTIVATED
position for the cargo area light to come
on.
The light has a three-position switch.
In the OFF position, the light does
not come on. In the center position, it
comes on when you open the tailgate
or doors. In the ON position, it stays
on continuously.
This light also works with the light
control switch (see page 99 ).

100
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

VANITY MIRROR CONSOLE COMPARTMENT BEVERAGE HOLDER

REAR COMPARTMENT

Instruments and Controls


GLOVE BOX

CARGO HOOKS

COIN BOX
BEVERAGE HOLDER

101
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Beverage Holders Console Compartment Glove Box


Be careful when you are using the Open the glove box by squeezing the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid handle. Close it with a firm push.
that is very hot can scald you or your Lock or unlock the glove box with
passengers. Spilled liquids can the master key.
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
An open glove box can cause
Open the front beverage holder by serious injury to your passenger
pushing on the lid. in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
LEVER belt.

Your vehicle is equipped with a flip- Always keep the glove box
over center console lid that provides closed while driving.
a tray and a beverage holder for the
second row passengers. To open the
beverage holders, pull up the center
lever on the center console and lift
the lid.

102
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Rear Compartment Sun Visor Vanity Mirror


Storage compartments are located in
the armrests for the third row seat. EXTENSION
To open a compartment, pull the
lever and lift the lid.

Instruments and Controls


Cargo Hooks
The hooks on the floor of the cargo
area enable you to tie down items
stored in the back. Make sure all
stored items are secured before
driving.
SUN VISOR

When using the sun visor for the Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
side window, remove the support rod it.
from the clip and swing it out. Slide
the extension out to get more The light comes on only when the
coverage on the side window. parking lights or headlights are on.

Make sure you put the sun visor


back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle. Do not use
the sun visor extension over the rear
view mirror.

103
Main Menu Table of Contents

Interior Convenience Items

Accessory Power Sockets When both the front and console


Your vehicle has three accessory sockets are being used, the
power sockets. The front accessory combined power rating of both
power socket is located under the accessories should be 120 watts or
audio system. The second socket is less (10 amps).
located in the center console
compartment. The rear socket is None of the sockets will power an
behind the third seat on the driver’s automotive type cigarette lighter
side. element.

To use the socket in the console


compartment, pull the cover up.

To use an accessory power socket,


the ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

These sockets are intended to supply


power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).

104
Main Menu

Features

The climate control system in your Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 106
vehicle provides a comfortable Airflow Buttons .............................. 107
driving environment in all weather Rear Climate Control .................... 111
conditions. Climate Control Sensors ............... 111
Playing the Radio ........................... 112
The standard audio system has Radio Reception ............................. 116
many features. This section de- Playing XM Satellite Radio ......... 118
scribes those features and how to Playing a CD ................................... 123

Features
use them. (If you selected an CD Changer.................................... 125
optional audio system, refer to the Protecting Your CDs ..................... 128
operating instructions that came CD Changer Error Messages ...... 129
with it.) Steering Wheel Controls .............. 130
Radio Theft Protection.................. 131
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Rear Entertainment System ......... 132
system that requires a code number Security System ............................. 145
to enable it. Cruise Control ................................ 146
Trip Computer ............................... 149
Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 155
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 156
HandsFreeLinkTM ........................... 160
OnStar ............................................. 173

105
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
REAR A/C CONTROL

AUTO BUTTON
TEMPERATURE BUTTONS
OFF BUTTON

DEFROST BUTTON
(Without Navigation System) (With Navigation System)

MODE A/C FAN SPEED A/C MODE FAN SPEED


BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON ICON ICONS ICONS

106
Main Menu Table of Contents

Airflow Buttons

Fan Control Button/Icon Recirculation Button Mode Control Button/Icon


Push the ▲ button or icon to When the indicator in the button is Use the mode control button or icon
increase the fan speed and air flow. on, air from the vehicle’s interior is to select the vents the air flows from.
Push the ▼ button or icon to recirculated throughout the system.
decrease it. When the indicator is off, air is NOTE: Regardless of what mode you
brought in from the outside of the are in, air flows out of the corner
Temperature Control Buttons vehicle (Fresh Air mode). vents unless the system is shut off or
Push the △ button to increase the the vent is manually shut off.

Features
temperature of air flow. Push the ▽ The outside air intakes for the
button to decrease it. When you set heating and cooling system are at Air flows from the center
the temperature to its lower limit or the base of the windshield. Keep this vents in the dashboard.
its upper limit, the system runs at full area clear of leaves and other debris.
cooling or heating only. It does not Airflow is divided between
regulate the interior temperature. The system should be left in fresh the vents in the dashboard and the
air mode under almost all conditions. floor vents.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button/ Keeping the system in recirculation
Icon mode, particularly with the A/C off, Airflows from the floor vents.
This button or icon turns the air can cause the windows to fog up.
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. Switch to recirculation mode when Airflow is divided between
driving through dusty or smoky the floor vents and the defroster
Rear Window Defogger Button conditions, then return to fresh air vents at the base of the windshield.
This button turns the rear window mode.
defogger on and off (see page 77 ).

CONTINUED

107
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

Air flows from the defroster Using the Heater Using the A/C
vents at the base of the windshield. The heater uses engine coolant to Air conditioning places an extra load
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it on the engine. Watch the engine
When you select , the system will be several minutes before you coolant temperature gauge (see page
automatically switches to Fresh Air feel warm air coming from the 69 ). If it moves near the red zone,
mode and turns on the A/C. system. turn off the A/C until the gauge
reads normally.
Ventilation Vehicles without Navigation System
The flow-through ventilation system 1. Select and Fresh Air mode. 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the
draws in outside air, circulates it 2. Set the fan to the desired speed. A/C button or touching the A/C
through the interior, then exhausts it 3. Adjust the warmth of the air with icon on the models with navigation
through vents near the rear side the temperature control buttons. system. A/C ON will be displayed
panels. on the screen.
Vehicles without Navigation System 2. Make sure the temperature is set
1. Set the temperature to maximum. 1. Press the A/C-INFO button to to maximum heat.
2. Make sure the A/C is off. show the information screen. 3. Select .
3. Select and Fresh Air mode. 2. Select the desired mode by 4. If the outside air is humid, select
4. Set the fan to the desired speed. touching the MODE icon, and set Recirculation mode. If the outside
the fan to the desired speed by air is dry, select Fresh Air mode.
touching the ▲ or ▼ icon. 5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
3. Adjust the warmth with the
temperature control buttons (△ or
▽).

108
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

If the interior is very warm, you can Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost
cool it down more rapidly by partially Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the
opening the windows, turning on the moisture from the air. When used in windows:
A/C, and setting the fan to combination with the heater, it
maximum speed in Fresh Air mode. makes the interior warm and dry. 1. Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
NOTE: The vehicle has two A/C and 1. Switch the fan on. 2. Select . The system
heater units. Both these units are 2. Turn on the air conditioning. automatically switches to Fresh

Features
controled by the front panel controls, 3. Select and Fresh Air mode. Air mode and turns on the A/C.
unless the RR A/C button is turned 4. Adjust the temperature to your The A/C indicator will not come
on. The rear passengers can also preference. on in U.S. vehicles.
adjust the direction, and temperature 3. Adjust the temperature so the
and amount of the airflow. This setting is suitable for all driving airflow feels warm.
conditions whenever the outside 4. Select to help clear the
temperature is above 32°F (0°C). rear window.
5. To increase airflow to the
windshield, close the corner vents.

When you switch to another mode


from , the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.

109
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vents, Heating, and A/C

To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice Using Automatic Climate Control In cold weather, the fan will not
From the Windows The Automatic Climate Control come on automatically until the
system can adjust the fan speed and heater starts to develop warm air.
1. Select . The system airflow levels to maintain the interior
automatically switches to Fresh temperature you select. Manual Operation
Air mode and turns on the A/C. You can manually select various
The A/C indicator will not come 1. Press the AUTO button. functions of the Climate Control
on in U.S. vehicles. 2. Set the desired temperature with system when it is in FULL AUTO.
2. Select . the temperature control buttons. All other features remain
3. Set the fan and temperature You will see FULL AUTO in the automatically controlled.
controls to maximum level. system’s display. Manually selecting a function causes
the word FULL in the display to go
To clear the windshield faster, you The system automatically selects the out.
can close the dashboard corner vents proper mix of conditioned and/or
by rotating the wheel below each heated air that will, as quickly as To Turn Everything Off
vent. This sends more warm air to possible, raise or lower the interior Press the OFF button. However, a
the windshield defroster vents. Once temperature from its current level to lack of airflow can cause the
the windshield is clear, select Fresh the set temperature. In FULL AUTO windows to fog up. You should keep
Air mode to avoid fogging the the rear A/C control panel cannot be the fan on at all times so stale air and
windows. used. moisture do not build up in the
For your safety, make sure you have interior and cause fogging.
a clear view through all the windows If you set the temperature to its
before driving. lower or its upper limit, the system
runs at full cooling or heating only. It
does not regulate the interior
temperature.

110
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Climate Control, Climate Control Sensors

Using the Rear A/C Unit NOTE: Individual rear control Climate Control Sensors
settings are shut off when the
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL ignition is turned off and return to TEMPERATURE SENSOR
MODE BUTTONS the automatic settings. They must be
reset when the ignition is turned on
again.

Features
FAN SPEED CONTROL DIAL

Press the RR A/C MANUAL button The climate control system has two
to enable the rear A/C control panel. sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
The indicator in the button will come top of the dashboard, and a
on. A passenger in the second row temperature sensor is next to the
can then use the temperature control steering column. Do not cover the
dial, fan speed dial, and mode sensors or spill any liquid on them.
buttons to adjust the temperature
and airflow to their preference. This
is limited by the system’s minimum
and maximum temperature.

111
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the Radio

U.S. models

(With Rear Entertainment System) (Without Rear Entertainment System)

AM/FM BUTTON TUNE KNOB PWR/VOL AM/FM BUTTON TUNE KNOB


KNOB

PWR/VOL PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS


KNOB
AUTO SELECT BUTTON SEEK BAR AUTO SELECT BUTTON SEEK BUTTONS
SCAN BUTTON SCAN BUTTON

112
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the Radio

Canadian models

(With Rear Entertainment System) (Without Rear Entertainment System)

PWR/VOL AM FM TUNE KNOB PWR/VOL AM FM TUNE KNOB


KNOB BUTTON BUTTON KNOB BUTTON BUTTON

Features
PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS
SCAN BUTTON SEEK BAR SCAN SEEK
BUTTON BUTTONS
AUTO SELECT BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON

113
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the Radio

To Play the Radio SEEK − The SEEK function Preset − Each preset button can
The ignition switch must be in the searches up and down from the store one frequency on AM, and two
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. current frequency to find a station frequencies on FM.
Turn the system on by pushing the with a strong signal. To activate it,
PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume press the + or − SEEK button, then 1. Select the desired band, AM or
by turning the same knob. release it. FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each preset
The band and frequency that the SCAN − The SCAN function button.
radio was last turned to is displayed. samples all stations with strong 2. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCAN
To change bands, press the AM or signals on the selected band. To function to tune the radio to a
FM button. On the FM band, ST will activate it, press the SCAN button, desired station.
be displayed if the station is then release it. You will see SCAN in 3. Pick a preset button, and hold it
broadcasting in stereo. Stereo the display. The system will scan for until you hear a beep.
reproduction in AM is not available. a station with a strong signal. When 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
it finds one, it will stop and play that total of six stations on AM and
To Select a Station station for about 10 seconds. twelve stations on FM.
You can use these five methods to
find radio stations on a selected If you do nothing, the system will
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the then scan for the next strong station
preset buttons, and AUTO SELECT . and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station that you want to listen
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to to, press the SCAN button again.
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.

114
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the Radio

AUTO SELECT − If you are To turn off Auto Select, press the Press the TUNE knob repeatedly to
traveling far from home and can no A. SEL button. This restores the display Bass, Treble, Balance, and
longer receive your preset stations, presets you originally set. Fader settings. Turn the TUNE knob
you can use the auto select feature to to adjust the setting. The indicators
find stations in the local area. Adjusting the Sound on the display will show you the
BALANCE − Adjust the Balance, adjustable range. The system will
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’ or side-to-side strength of the sound. return to the audio display in about 5
flashes in the display, and the system seconds.

Features
goes into scan mode for several FADER − Adjust the Fader, or the
seconds. It stores the frequencies of front-to-back strength of the sound. On models with navigation system,
six AM, and twelve FM stations in push and hold the TUNE button for
the preset buttons. TREBLE − Adjust the Treble in the 5 seconds to display information on
sound. the navigation screen.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed if auto
select cannot find a strong station for BASS − Adjust the Bass in the
every preset button. sound.

If you do not like the stations Auto


Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find stations, then
store them in the preset buttons as
described previously.

115
Main Menu Table of Contents

Radio Reception

Audio System Lighting Stations must use these exact go off and the sound will fade
You can use the instrument panel frequencies. It is fairly common for completely as you get out of range of
brightness control knob to adjust the stations to round-off the frequency in the station’s signal.
illumination of the audio system (see their advertising, so your radio could
page 76 ). The audio system display a frequency of 100.9 even
illuminates when the parking lights though the announcer may identify
are on, even if the radio is turned off. the station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception


Your vehicle’s radio can receive the How well your vehicle’s radio
complete AM and FM bands. receives stations is dependent on
Those bands cover these frequen- many factors, such as the distance
cies: from the station’s transmitter,
nearby large objects, and
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertz atmospheric conditions.
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
A radio station’s signal gets weaker Driving very near the transmitter of
Radio stations on the AM band are as you get farther away from its a station that is broadcasting on a
assigned frequencies at least ten transmitter. If you are listening to an frequency close to the frequency of
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550). AM station, you will notice the sound the station you are listening to can
Stations on the FM band are volume becoming weaker and the also affect your radio’s reception.
assigned frequencies at least 0.2 station drifting in and out. If you are You may temporarily hear both
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). listening to an FM station, you will stations, or hear only the station you
see the stereo indicator flickering off are close to.
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will

116
Main Menu Table of Contents

Radio Reception

As required by the FCC:


Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.

Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.

117
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

(With Rear Entertainment System) (Without Rear Entertainment System)

PWR/VOL KNOB XM RADIO BUTTON TUNE KNOB PWR/VOL KNOB XM RADIO BUTTON TUNE KNOB

PRESET BUTTONS PRESET BUTTONS

SCAN BUTTON DISP/MODE CATEGORY SCAN BUTTON DISP/MODE CATEGORY


BUTTON BUTTONS BUTTON BUTTONS

118
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Your vehicle is capable of receiving MODE − To switch between the On models with navigation system,
XM Satellite Radio anywhere in the channel mode and the category push and hold the TUNE button for
United States, except Hawaii and mode, press and hold the DISP/ 5 seconds to display XM information
Alaska. MODE button until the mode on the navigation screen.
XM is a registered trademark of changes. On models with navigation
XM Satellite Radio, Inc. system, touch the MODE icon on the TUNE − Turn the TUNE knob left
audio display. or right to select channels. In the
Satellite radio receives signals from category mode, you can only select

Features
two satellites to produce clear, high- In the channel mode, you can select channels within that category.
quality digital reception. It offers all of the available channels. In the
many channels in several categories. category mode, such as Jazz, Rock, CATEGORY (○ − or ○ + ) − In the
Along with a large selection of Classical, etc., you can select all of category mode, press either button
different types of music, satellite the channels within that category. to select another category.
radio also allows you to view channel
and category selections in the audio Each time you press and release the
display. DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
Operating the Satellite Radio channel name, channel number,
To listen to satellite radio, turn the category, artist name, and music title.
ignition switch to ACCESSORY(I) or
ON (II). Push the PWR/VOL knob You may experience periods when
to turn on the audio system, and XM Radio does not transmit the
press the XM button. Adjust the artist’s name and song title
volume by turning the PWR/VOL information. If this happens, there is
knob. The last channel you listened nothing wrong with your system.
to will show in the display.

119
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

SCAN − The SCAN function gives To store a channel: 3. Pick the preset button (icon) you
you a sampling of all channels while Preset − You can store up to 12 want for that channel. Press and
in the channel mode. In the category preset channels using the six preset hold the button (icon) until you
mode, only the stations within that buttons or preset icons (on models hear a beep.
category are scanned. To activate with navigation system). Each button
SCAN, press the SCAN button or stores one channel from the XM1 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
touch the SCAN icon on the audio band and one channel from the XM2 first six channels.
display (models with navigation band.
system). The system plays each 5. Press the XM button again. The
channel in numerical order for a few To store a channel: other XM band will show. Store
seconds, then selects the next 1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 the next six channels using steps 2
channel. When you hear a channel or XM2 will show in the display. and 3.
you want to continue listening to,
press the button or touch the icon 2. Use the TUNE knob, or the Once a channel is stored, simply
again. CATEGORY or SCAN buttons to press and release the proper preset
tune to a desired channel. button (icon) to tune to it.

In the category mode, only channels The presets will be lost if your
within that category can be selected. vehicle’s battery goes dead, is
In the channel mode, all channels disconnected, or the radio fuse is
can be selected. removed.

120
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

The XM satellites are in orbit over


Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in
the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be

Features
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator.

SATELLITE

GROUND
REPEATER
CONTINUED

121
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing the XM Satellite Radio (U.S. Models)

Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s After you’ve registered with XM
authority to operate the equipment. Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the south side of an Satellite Radio mode while you wait
east/west mountain road. Receiving Satellite Radio Service for activation. This should take about
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Radio service has expired 30 minutes.
large commercial truck on an or you purchased your vehicle from
east/west road. a previous owner, you can listen to a While waiting for activation, make
Driving in the tunnels. sampling of the broadcasts available sure your vehicle remains in an open
Driving on a road beside a vertical on XM Satellite Radio. With the area with good reception. Once your
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south ignition switch in the ACCESSORY audio system is activated,
of you. (I) or ON (II) position, push the ‘‘CATEGORY’’ or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in
Driving on the lower level of a PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio the display, and you’ll be able to
multi-tiered road. system and press the XM button. A listen to XM Radio broadcasts. XM
Driving on a single lane road variety of music types and styles will Radio will continue to send an
alongside dense trees taller than play. activation signal to your vehicle for
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. at least 12 hours from the activation
Cargo may be attached to roof If you decide to purchase XM request. If the service has not been
rack. Satellite Radio service, contact XM activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at Radio.
There may be other geographic 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
situations that could affect satellite them your radio I.D. number and
radio reception. your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE

122
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD

U.S. models

(With Rear Entertainment System) (Without Rear Entertainment System)

CD LOAD CD SLOT CD EJECT BUTTON


PWR/VOL KNOB CD SLOT CD BUTTON BUTTON
CD EJECT BUTTON

Features
PWR/VOL
CD LOAD RANDOM BUTTON KNOB RANDOM BUTTON SKIP
BUTTON BUTTONS
SKIP REPEAT BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON BUTTONS

123
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD

Canadian models

(With Rear Entertainment System) (Without Rear Entertainment System)

CD LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT CD EJECT BUTTON CD LOAD BUTTON CD SLOT CD EJECT BUTTON

PWR/VOL RANDOM BUTTON SKIP PWR/VOL RANDOM BUTTON SKIP


KNOB BUTTONS KNOB BUTTONS
REPEAT BUTTON CD BUTTON REPEAT BUTTON CD BUTTON

124
Main Menu Table of Contents

Playing a CD

To Play a CD REPEAT − To continuously replay If you turn the system off while a CD
Premium model only a track, press and release the RPT is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
With the ignition in the button. You will see RPT/REPEAT knob or by turning off the ignition,
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, in the display. Press the RPT button the disc will stay in the drive. When
insert a CD into the CD slot. The again to turn it off. you turn the system back on, the CD
drive will pull the CD in the rest of will begin playing where it left off.
the way and begin to play it. RANDOM − This feature plays the
tracks in random order. To activate

Features
You operate the CD player with the Random Play, press and release the
same controls used for the radio. RDM button. You will see RDM in
The number of the track playing is the display. Press the RDM button
shown in the display. The system will again to return to normal play.
continuously play a CD until you
change modes. To Stop Playing a CD
Press the eject button to remove the
SKIP − Each time you press and CD. If you eject the CD, but do not
release the + skip button the player remove it from the slot, the system
skips forward to the beginning of the will automatically reload the CD
next track. Press and release the − after 15 seconds and put it in pause
skip button to skip backward to the mode. To begin playing, press the
beginning of the current track. Press CD button.
it again to skip to the beginning of
the previous track. Press the AM or FM button (AM/
FM button on the U.S. models) to
To move rapidly within a track, press switch to the radio while a CD is
and hold the + or − skip button. playing. CONTINUED

125
Main Menu Table of Contents

CD Changer

Touring Model Loading CDs in the Changer 5. Repeat this until all six positions
The audio system on your vehicle 1. Press and hold the LOAD button are loaded. The system will then
has an in-dash CD changer that until you hear a beep, then release begin playing the last CD loaded.
holds up to six discs. the button.
To load CDs or operate CD changer, If you are not loading CDs into all six
the ignition switch must be in the To load only one CD, press and positions, press the LOAD button
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. release the Load button. again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
You cannot load and play 3-inch 2. On the left side of the display, the last CD loaded.
(8-cm) discs in this system. CD Loaded indicator for an empty
position will begin blinking. If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, and you do not
3. When you see LOAD in the press the Load button, the system
display, insert the disc into the CD will wait for 10 seconds, then stop
slot. Insert it only about halfway, the load operation and begin playing
the drive will pull it in the rest of the last CD loaded.
the way. You will again see the
dashes in the display as the CD is
loaded.

4. When LOAD appears again in the


display, insert the next disc into
the CD slot. Do not try to insert a
disc until LOAD appears. You
could damage the audio unit.

126
Main Menu Table of Contents

CD Changer

If you press the LOAD button while Removing CDs from the Changer If you press the Eject button while
a disc is playing, the system will stop To remove the disc that is currently listening to the radio, XM radio, or
playing that disc and start the playing, press the eject button. You with the audio system turned off, the
loading sequence. It will then play will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display. The disc that was last selected is ejected.
the disc just loaded. system automatically begins the After that disc is ejected, pressing
Load sequence so you can load the Eject button again will eject the
You can also load a CD into an empty another CD in that position. If you do next disc in the numerical order. By
position while a CD is playing by not load another CD, after 10 doing this six times, you can remove

Features
pressing the appropriate preset seconds the system begins playing all the CDs from the changer.
button. Select an empty position (the the next disc in the changer. If the
CD Loaded indicator is off), and changer is empty, the system selects In any mode, if you press the eject
press the preset button for that the previous mode (AM, FM, or XM button and hold it until you hear a
position (1 to 6). The system will radio). beep, the system will eject all of the
stop playing the current CD and start discs in the changer.
the loading sequence. It will then If you do not remove the disc from
play the CD just loaded. the slot, the system will reload the You can also eject discs when the
disc after 10 seconds and begin ignition switch is off. The disc that
playing it. was last selected is ejected first. You
can eject up to six discs, one at a
To remove a different CD from the time.
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
CD begins playing, press the eject
button.

127
Main Menu Table of Contents

Protecting Your CDs

General Information Protecting CDs


When using CD-R discs, use only When a CD is not being played, store
high quality CDs labeled for audio it in its case to protect it from dust
use. and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
When recording a CD-R, the sunlight and extreme heat.
recording must be closed for it to
be used by the system. To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
CD-RW discs will not work in this to the outside edge.
unit.
A new CD may be rough on the
Play only standard round CDs. inner and outer edges. The small
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never
drive or cause other problems. can flake off and fall on the re- touch either surface. Do not place
cording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
Handle your CDs properly to skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination
prevent damage and skipping. these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play
pencil or pen. properly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Do not use discs with adhesive labels. Never try to insert foreign objects in
The label can curl up and cause the the CD player or the magazine.
disc to jam in the unit.

128
Main Menu Table of Contents

CD Changer Error Messages

If you see an error message in the


display while operating the CD Error Messages Cause Solution
changer, find the cause in the
following charts. If you cannot clear Disc changer See your dealer.
the error message, take the vehicle malfunction.
to your dealer. High temperature. Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Disc changer See your dealer.

Features
malfunction.
High temperature. Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.

129
Main Menu Table of Contents

Steering Wheel Controls

CH BUTTON The middle button adjusts the If you are playing a CD, the system
volume up (▲) or down (▼). Press skips to the beginning of the next
the top or bottom of the button and track each time you push the CH
hold it until the desired volume is button. You will see the disc and
reached, then release it. track number in the display.

The CH button has three functions,


depending on whether you are
listening to the radio, or playing a
CD.
VOLUME MODE
BUTTON BUTTON If you are listening to the radio, use the
CH button to change stations. Each
Three controls for the audio system time you press this button, the
are mounted in the steering wheel system advances to the next preset
hub. These let you control basic station on the band you are listening
functions without removing your to. You will see the number of the
hand from the wheel. selected preset button in the display.
To change bands, or to change from
The MODE button changes the FM1 to FM2, press the AM/FM
audio mode between FM1, FM2, AM, button.
CD, and DVD/AUX, and XM (if a
disc is inserted).

130
Main Menu Table of Contents

Radio Theft Protection

Your vehicle’s audio system will If your vehicle’s battery is If the code card is lost, an Acura
disable itself if it is disconnected disconnected or goes dead, the audio dealer can access your code with
from electrical power for any reason. system will disable itself. If this your radio’s serial number. To
To make it work again, you must happens, you will see ‘‘Code’’ in the access the serial number, turn the
enter a specific five-digit code with frequency display the next time you radio on. It must display ‘‘COdE’’,
the Preset buttons. Because there turn on the system. Use the Preset then turn the radio off. Push the
are hundreds of number buttons to enter the five-digit code. preset 1, preset 6, and power buttons
combinations possible from the five The code is located on the radio code at the same time, then quickly

Features
digits, making the system work card included in your Owner’s release.
without knowing the exact code is Manual kit. When it is entered
nearly impossible. correctly, the radio will start playing. You will have to store your favorite
stations in the preset buttons after
You should have received a card that If you make a mistake entering the the system begins working. Your
lists your audio system code number code, do not start over; complete the original settings were lost when the
and serial number. It is best to store five-digit sequence, then enter the power was disconnected.
this card in a safe place at home. In correct code. You have ten tries to
addition, you should write the audio enter the correct code. If you are
system’s serial number in this owner’s unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
manual. must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
If you should happen to lose the card,
you must obtain the code number
from your dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.

131
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

(U.S. models) (Canadian models)


REAR SPEAKER REAR SPEAKER
OFF ICON OFF ICON

REAR PWR REAR CTRL REAR REAR PWR REAR CTRL REAR
BUTTON SELECTOR CONTROL BUTTON SELECTOR CONTROL
KNOB OFF ICON KNOB OFF ICON

REPEAT PLAY SEEK/ REPEAT PLAY PAUSE SEEK/SKIP


BUTTON BUTTON SKIP BAR BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON BAR

RANDOM PAUSE RANDOM


BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON

132
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

If equipped To Turn On the System Rear Speakers


With this system, the rear Press the REAR PWR button. To When you turn on the system, the
passengers can enjoy a different turn on the rear controls (ceiling rear speakers are automatically
entertainment source (AM/FM panel or remote), press the REAR turned off. You will see the Rear
radio, XM radio, CD changer, DVD CTRL knob. The system’s icon Speakers Off icon in the display. The
player or AUX) than the front seat shows in the right side display. Your sound for the rear system is sent to
occupants. The audio is broadcast passengers can then operate the rear the wireless headphones.
through the supplied wireless system with the control panel in the

Features
headphones. ceiling or with the remote control. If you want to turn the rear speakers
Press the REAR CTRL knob again to on again, press and hold the REAR
turn the rear controls off. You will PWR button until the Rear Speakers
see the Rear Controls Off icon in the Off icon goes off.
right display.
NOTE: The rear speakers are
The rear system selects the source it connected to the front system, so
was last set to. If that source has they will always play the source that
been removed (the DVD has been the front system is set to.
ejected from the player, for example),
you will see ‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display.
You must select another source.

133
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

To Select Rear Entertainment Operating the DVD Player from REAR CONTROL PANEL
from the Front Control Panel the Front Control Panel
To operate the rear entertainment The DVD player in your Rear
system from the front panel, turn the Entertainment System can play DVD
REAR CTRL knob clockwise. The video discs and CDs. It features
amber RR LED comes on to show Dolby* noise reduction.
that the control panel is enabled.

Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
To play the radio or XM radio, the license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo- BUTTON
buttons for the front entertainment ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
system have the same functions. are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation. OVERHEAD SCREEN
If a CD is loaded in the main CD
changer, select CD/CHG. If the CD Open the overhead screen by
is loaded in the lower player, select pushing on the button. The screen
DVD/AUX. will swing down part-way. Pivot the
screen the rest of the way (to detent
one or two). If you pivot the screen
too far forward, past detent three,
the display will turn off. Pivot the
screen back to the detent to turn the
display back on. To close the screen,
pivot it up until it latches.

134
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

DVD SLOT EJECT BUTTON PLAY − Press the PLAY button beginning of the previous track or
if the DVD does not start playing chapter.
automatically.
EJECT − Press the eject button to
PAUSE − Press the PAUSE button remove the DVD from the drive.
to pause the DVD. Press the button
again or press PLAY to resume. To Return to Front Audio
Pause works only with the DVD Controls

Features
player. To return front panel control to the
front audio system, turn the RR
SEEK/SKIP − Press and hold the CTRL knob counterclockwise.
+ side to move forward; you will see
‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press and hold
Turn the REAR CTRL knob the − side to move backward; you
clockwise. The amber RR LED will will see ‘‘REV’’ in the display.
come on to show that the control Release the bar when the system
panel is now enabled. reaches the point you want.

Insert a DVD or CD into the DVD Each time you press and release the
player below the front panel. + side of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the
system skips forward to the
Push the disc in halfway, the drive beginning of the next track or
will pull it in the rest of the way. chapter. Press and release the −
side of the bar to skip backward to
the beginning of the current track or
chapter. Press it again to skip to the

135
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Using the Rear Control Panel


Use these buttons to select the
entertainment source (radio, XM
radio, CD changer, or DVD player/
Auxiliary device). The selected
source will be shown in the display. SOURCE SELECTION BUTTONS MENU BUTTON
Make sure the rear control operation SEEK/SKIP
has not been disabled with the REAR REAR CONTROLS BUTTON
CTRL knob on the front panel. OFF INDICATOR
CH/DISK
NOTE: When the display is open, BUTTON
use the manual controls to select
icons from the menu. SEEK/SKIP
BUTTON
To Play the Radio from the Rear
Control Panel
Use the and buttons to
select from the stations on the radio
preset buttons. Pressing the or PLAY/PAUSE/PROG BUTTON ENTER BUTTON CH/DISK BUTTON
button will cause the system to
search up or down the band for a
station with a strong signal. You will
see SEEK in the display.

136
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

To Play a CD from the Rear To Play a DVD from the Rear MENU/ENT − To select the menu
Control Panel Control Panel on the DVD, press the MENU
If a CD is loaded in the main CD The video screen is for use by rear button. Use the , , ▲ ,
changer, select it by pressing the seat passengers only. The driver and and ▼ buttons to move to the
CD/CHG button. If the CD is loaded front seat passenger should not try desired menu selection, then press
in the DVD player, press the DVD/ to view the screen while driving. the ENT button to enter your
AUX button. selection.
PLAY/PAUSE/PROG − Press

Features
Press the button to skip to the this button when you want to pause
beginning of the next track. Press the DVD. Press this button again to
the button to return to the go back to PLAY.
beginning of the current track. If the
changer is selected, use the ▼ and SEEK/SKIP − Press the
▲ buttons to change discs. button to skip to the beginning
of the next chapter. Press the
button to skip back to the
beginning of the current chapter.

137
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Using the Remote Control


You can use the remote control to SOURCE SELECTION
select the entertainment source BUTTONS
(radio, CD player, or DVD player/
Auxiliary device). The selected
source will be shown in the display. REW/FWD BUTTONS
SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS
Make sure the rear control operation
has not been disabled with the RR
CTRL knob on the front panel.
When using the remote control, STOP BUTTON
point it at the rear control panel in PAUSE BUTTON
the ceiling. PLAY/PROG BUTTON DISP BUTTON
XM MODE BUTTON
To Play a CD or Radio TITLE/CAPTER BUTTON
The PLAY/PROG, PAUSE, SKIP, SET-UP BUTTON
and FWD/REW buttons work the MENU BUTTON POWER (T/C) BUTTON
same function as the front and rear RETURN BUTTON
control panel buttons.

To Play a DVD
The PLAY/PROG, PAUSE, SKIP,
and FWD/REW buttons work the
same function as the front and rear
control panel buttons.

138
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

STOP Button − Press this button DISP Button − To change the RETURN Button − In the MENU
to stop playing a DVD. color, contrast, aspect ratio, and selection mode, pressing the
brightness of the video screen, press RETURN button for less than 2
MENU and TITLE Buttons − the DISP button. The current setting seconds changes the MENU display
Some DVDs have menus that allow of one will be displayed on the to the previous page. Pressing the
you to select a dubbed language, screen each time you press the RETURN button for more than 2
subtitles, a chapter list, previews, etc. button. Use the and seconds while a DVD is playing
The menu contents will vary from buttons to change the setting brings the system into the TITLE

Features
DVD to DVD. as desired. The display will disappear enter mode. When you enter your
from the screen several seconds selection, the DVD player will start
Use the , , ▲ , and after you stop adjusting the setting. playing from the selected title.
▼ buttons to select the desired
menu option. Then press ENT to
enter your selection. Use the
and buttons to change
pages. You can also use the
numbered buttons to enter the two-
digit number of a menu option. You
do not have to press ENT. Press the
button again to close the window.

139
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Replacing the Remote Control As required by the FCC: This device Storing the Remote Control
Batteries complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.

Changes or modifications not expressly


approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment. HOLDER

This device complies with Industry When you are not using the remote
The remote control uses two Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is control, store it in holder in the front
AA batteries. To replace the subject to the following two conditions: seat-back pocket.
batteries, put a coin in the notch on (1) this device may not cause
the back. Turn it one-quarter, then interference, and (2) this device must
slide the cover off. Remove the old accept any interference that may cause
batteries. Make sure the polarity of undesired operation of the device.
the new batteries is correct when
you install them. Slide the cover on
until it locks.

140
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Playable DVDs DVD Player Error Messages


If you see an error message in the display while operating the DVD player,
find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear the message, take your
vehicle to your dealer.

Error Message Cause Solution

Features
Press the EJECT button and pull out the DVD.
FOCUS Error Check if it is inserted correctly in the DVD
Player. Make sure the DVD is not scratched or
damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the DVD.
Mechanical Error, or a Check it for damage or deformation.
There are various types of DVDs DVD has been loaded in If the DVD cannot be pulled out, or the error
available. Some of them are not the CD player message does not disappear after the DVD is
compatible with your system. ejected, see your dealer.
The DVD player in your Rear Do not try to force the DVD out of the player.
Entertainment System can play High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
DVDs and CDs bearing the above normal.
marks on their packages or jackets. Low Vehicle Battery Run the engine to recharge the battery.
Those packages or jackets should Voltage
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be played
in this system.

141
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Wireless Headphones The audio for the rear entertainment Replacing Batteries
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. The antennas
are in the front of the earpieces. If
you wear the headphones backwards,
the antennas will be aimed away
from the system, affecting the sound
quality and range.
VOLUME DIAL TAB
To use the headphones, pivot the
Some state and local government earpieces outward. This turns them Each headphone uses one AAA
agencies prohibit the use of on. To adjust the volume, turn the battery. The battery is under the
headphones by the driver of a motor dial on the bottom of the right cover on the left earpiece. To
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws earpiece. When you remove the remove the cover, insert a coin in the
and regulations. headphones, the earpieces slot and twist it slightly to pry the
automatically pivot inward, and the cover away from the earpiece. Pull
headphones turn off. When not in the cover outward, and pivot it out of
use, store the headphones in the the way.
pocket of either front seat.

142
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

Auxiliary Input Jacks


COVER ARMREST LEVER

Features
BATTERY AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

Remove the battery. Install the new Auxiliary input jacks and wired The system will accept auxiliary
battery in the earpice as shown in headphone jacks for the rear inputs from standard video games
the diagram next to the battery slot. entertainment system are under the and video equipment.
Slide the cover back into place on the third seat armrest on the passenger’s
earpiece, then press down on the side. To access these jacks, open the Some video game power supplies
back edge to lock it in place. cover by pulling up on the lever. may cause poor picture quality.

V = Video jack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack

CONTINUED

143
Main Menu Table of Contents

Rear Entertainment System

VOLUME DIALS

HEADPHONE JACKS

There are three wired headphone


jacks for the third seat passengers.
Each jack has its own volume control.
These headphones are not supplied
with the vehicle.

144
Main Menu Table of Contents

Security System

The security system helps to protect SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR The security system will not set if
your vehicle and valuables from theft. the hood, tailgate, or any door is not
The horn sounds and a combination fully closed. If the system will not set,
of headlights, parking lights, side check the Door and Tailgate Open
marker lights, and taillights flashes if Monitor on the instrument panel
someone attempts to break into your (see page 62 ) to see if the doors and
vehicle or remove the radio. This tailgate are fully closed. Since it is
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then not part of the monitor display,

Features
the system resets. To reset an manually check the hood.
alarming system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the NOTE: Use the remote transmitter
driver’s door with the key or the to quickly check that the hood,
remote transmitter. tailgate and all doors are closed.
Once the security system is set, Push the lock button twice. There
The security system automatically opening any door or the tailgate should be an audible confirmation
sets 15 seconds after you lock the without using the key or the remote beep.
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the transmitter, or the hood, will cause it
system to activate, you must lock the to alarm. It also alarms if the radio, Do not attempt to alter this system
doors from the outside with the key, navigation and DVD components are or add other devices to it.
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote removed from the dashboard or the
transmitter. The security system wiring is cut.
indicator next to the driver’s door
lock starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.

145
Main Menu Table of Contents

Cruise Control

Cruise control allows you to maintain Using the Cruise Control


a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH RESUME/ACCEL
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

CANCEL
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash. SET/DECEL

Use the cruise control only 1. Push in the Cruise Control Master The cruise control may not hold
when traveling on open Switch. The indicator in the switch the set speed when you are going
highways in good weather. will come on. up and down hills. If your speed
increases going down a hill, use
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising the brakes to slow down. This will
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h). cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
3. Press and release the SET/ RESUME/ACCEL button. The
DECEL button on the steering indicator on the instrument panel
wheel. Indicator on the instrument will come back on.
panel comes on to show the
system is now activated.

146
Main Menu Table of Contents

Cruise Control

Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising Even with the cruise control turned
You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways: on, you can still use the accelerator
speed in any of these ways: pedal to speed up for passing. After
NOTE: If you need to decrease your completing the pass, take your foot
Press and hold the RESUME/ speed quickly, use the brakes as you off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
ACCEL button. When you reach normally would. will return to the set cruising speed.
the desired cruising speed, release
the button. Press and hold the SET/DECEL Resting your foot on the brake pedal

Features
button. Release the button when causes cruise control to cancel.
Push on the accelerator pedal. you reach the desired speed.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, and press the SET/DECEL To slow down in very small
button. amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
To increase your speed in very your vehicle will slow down about
small amounts, tap the RESUME/ 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up Tap the brake pedal lightly with
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.

147
Main Menu Table of Contents

Cruise Control

Cancelling the Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed


You can cancel the cruise control in When you push the CANCEL button,
any of these ways: or tap the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously set
Tap the brake pedal. cruising speed. To return to that
Push the CANCEL button on the speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
steering wheel. (40 km/h) and then press and
Push the cruise control master release the RESUME/ACCEL
button. button. The CRUISE CONTROL
indicator comes on. The vehicle will
accelerate to the same cruising
speed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control Master


Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed.

148
Main Menu Table of Contents

Trip Computer

INSTANTANEOUS OUTSIDE
FUEL MILEAGE TEMPERATURE
CLOCK COMPASS

Features
CLOCK
BUTTON

TRIP
BUTTON
RESET
BUTTON

−/CALIBRATE BUTTON

+/ZONE BUTTON
DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS RESET, SET BUTTON
CONTROL

149
Main Menu Table of Contents

Trip Computer

All models of MDX have a trip The Range, or estimated distance Changing and Resetting the
computer. To operate the trip you can travel on the fuel Display
computer on models with the remaining in the tank estimated Press the TRIP button to show either
navigation system, refer to the from the fuel economy you have the range and Avg fuel economy, or
navigation manual. gotten over the last several miles the E/T and Trip odometer.
(kilometers).
(Without Navigation System) To reset the Avg fuel economy, E/T,
The Trip Computer displays the The Avg display shows you the and Trip odometer, press and hold
following information. average fuel economy since you the RESET button until you hear a
last reset the display. beep.
Clock
The E/T is the elapsed time that Changing Units of Measurement
Direction of travel the ignition has been on. It The outside temperature, fuel
automatically resets to 0.0 when it economy, range, and trip odometer
Outside temperature reaches twelve hours. This display can be displayed in either English or
can be reset at any time. Metric units. To change between
The temperature sensor is located units, press the TRIP button and
in the front bumper, and can be The Trip display shows you the hold it for five seconds.
affected by heat from the road total distance you have driven
surface, engine heat, and the since it was last reset.
exhaust from the surrounding
traffic. Because of these The display also has manual
conditions, it may take a while for functions for the Climate Control
the temperature to read correctly. System. Refer to page 106 .

Instantaneous fuel mileage

150
Main Menu Table of Contents

Trip Computer

Setting the Clock 2. To change the hours to a lower You can quickly set the time to the
number, press and hold the nearest hour. Press the CLOCK
MODE button. To change the button, then press the RESET button.
hours to a higher number, press If the displayed time is before the
and hold the A/C button. half hour, it will reset back to the
previous hour. If the displayed time
3. When the hours reach the desired is after the half hour, it will reset
number, release the button. forward to the next hour.

Features
4. To set the minutes, press the For example:
CLOCK button again. The 1:06 will reset to 1:00
minutes digits will start blinking. 1:52 will reset to 2:00

5. Use the MODE or A/C button to


To set the clock: set the minutes to the desired
number.
1. Push the CLOCK button. The
hours digits will start blinking. If 6. Press the CLOCK button again.
you want to only set the minutes, The clock will return to its normal
go to step 4. display.

151
Main Menu Table of Contents

Trip Computer

Compass Operation
Compass operation can be affected
by driving near power lines or
stations, across bridges, through
tunnels, over railroad crossings, past
large vehicles, or driving near large
objects that can cause a magnetic
disturbance. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.

Compass Calibration
If you see ‘‘−−’’ in the direction 1. Press and hold the CLOCK and 4. Drive the vehicle slowly in two
display and ‘‘Calibrate’’ is blinking, TRIP buttons until the display complete circles.
the compass is self-calibrating. changes (about 1 second).
The compass may need to be 5. When the display goes from
manually calibrated after exposure to 2. Press the Calibrate (MODE) ‘‘−−’’ to an actual heading, the
a strong magnetic field. If the button. unit is calibrated.
compass seems to be continually
showing the wrong direction and is 3. Press the Set (FAN) button. 6. Press the CLOCK, TRIP, or
not self-calibrating, do the following. ‘‘Calibrate’’ will start blinking, and RESET button to complete the
the direction display will change to calibration and return the display
NOTE: You should do this procedure ‘‘−−’’. to normal.
in an open area, away from buildings,
power lines, and other vehicles.

152
Main Menu Table of Contents

Trip Computer

Compass Zone Selection 4. If the zone is incorrect, press and


In most areas, there is a variation hold the MODE button to get the
between magnetic north and true number to count down, or the A/C
north. Zone selection is required so button to get the number to count
the compass can compensate for this up. If the zone is correct, continue
variation. To check and select the to step 5.
zone set into the compass, do the
following. 5. Press the Set (FAN) button to set

Features
the zone selection.

6. Press the CLOCK, TRIP or


RESET button to exit the zone
selection and return display to
2. Press the Zone (A/C) button. The normal.
zone the compass is currently set
to is displayed.

3. Find the zone for your area on the


map.

1. Press and hold the CLOCK and


TRIP buttons until the display
changes (about 1 second).

CONTINUED

153
Main Menu Table of Contents

Trip Computer

154
Main Menu Table of Contents

Trip Computer, Rear View Camera and Monitor

BRIGHTNESS control Rear View Camera and Monitor When in reverse, the touch screen,
The Brightness control has seven Navigation models and Navi ‘‘hard’’ buttons are locked
positions. In the middle five positions out, except the A/C-INFO button.
the display will dim when you turn REAR VIEW CAMERA Touching the A/C-INFO button
on the parking lights or headlights. allows you to adjust the brightness of
the rear view camera image. Touch
Moving the control to the far left the A/C-INFO button again to leave
position turns off the display. It will the brightness adjust mode.

Features
come back on for several seconds if
you press any of the buttons. NOTE: The camera brightness
In the far right (maximum cannot be adjusted by voice control.
brightness) position, the display will
not dim when you turn on the Since the rear view camera display
parking lights. area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
Cleaning the Display Whenever you shift to R (Reverse) look behind you for obstacles.
Always use a soft cloth and mild with the ignition switch in the ON
glass/plastic cleaner (such as (II) position, the rear view is shown
cleaners for computer monitor on the navigation system screen.
screens) to clean the display.
For the best picture, always keep the
When you wipe the screen, some rear view camera clean, and do not
black lines may appear because of cover the camera lens.
static electricity build-up. This is
normal. They will disappear in 5 to
10 minutes.

155
Main Menu Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

The HomeLink Universal reverse if an obstacle is detected Training HomeLink


Transceiver built into your vehicle during closing, increasing the risk of Before you begin − If you just
can be programmed to operate up to injury. received your vehicle and have not
three remotely controlled devices trained any of the buttons in
around your home, such as garage Important Safety Precautions HomeLink before, you should erase
doors, lighting, or home security Always refer to the opening any previously learned codes before
systems. instructions and safety information training the first button. To do this,
that came with your garage door press and hold the two outside
General Information opener or other equipment you buttons on the HomeLink
If you are training HomeLink to intend to operate with HomeLink. If Transceiver for about 20 seconds,
operate a garage door or gate, you you do not have this information, until the red indicator flashes.
should unplug the motor for that contact the manufacturer of the Release the buttons, then proceed to
device during training. Repeatedly equipment. step 1.
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor. If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. If your garage door
opener was manufactured before
April 1982, you may not be able to
program HomeLink to operate it.
They do not have the safety feature
that causes the motor to stop and

156
Main Menu Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

3. Press and hold the remote control 6. Plug in the garage door opener
button and one of the HomeLink motor, then test the HomeLink
buttons at the same time. button by pushing it. If the button
does not work, repeat the
Canadian Owners: The remote control procedure to train it again. If it still
you are training from may stop does not work, you may have a
transmitting after 2 seconds. This is variable or rolling code garage
not long enough for HomeLink to door opener. See if you do by

Features
learn the code. Release and press the pressing and holding the
button on the remote control every 2 HomeLink button you just trained.
seconds until HomeLink has learned If the red indicator blinks for 2
the code. seconds then stays on, you have a
rolling code garage door opener.
1. Unplug the garage door opener 4. The red indicator in HomeLink Go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
motor from the house current. should begin flashing. It will flash Code System’’ (see page 158 ).
slowly at first, then rapidly.
2. Hold the end of the garage door 7. Repeat these steps to train the
opener remote control 2 to 5 5. When the red indicator flashes other two HomeLink buttons to
inches from HomeLink. Make rapidly, release both buttons. operate any other remotely
sure you are not blocking your HomeLink should have learned controlled devices around your
view of the red indicator in the code from the remote control. home (lighting, automatic gate,
HomeLink. security system, etc.).

157
Main Menu Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Training With a Rolling Code TRAINING BUTTON 4. Press and hold the button on
System HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’ 5. Press and hold the HomeLink
or variable code. Information from button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
the remote control and the garage This should turn off the training
door opener are needed before indicator on the garage door
HomeLink can operate the garage opener unit. (Some systems may
door opener. require you to press the button up
to three times.)
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the 6. Press the HomeLink button again.
proper garage door opener code. It should operate the garage door.
The following procedure 3. Press the training button on the
synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the
garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes
receives the correct codes. on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
1. Make sure you have properly have approximately 30 seconds to
completed the ‘‘Training complete the following steps.
HomeLink’’ procedure.

2. Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your


garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.

158
Main Menu Table of Contents

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Erasing Codes Customer Assistance As required by the FCC:


To erase the codes stored in all three If you have problems with training This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red light or would like information on home following two conditions: (1) This device
begins to flash, then release the products that can be operated by may not cause harmful interference, and
buttons. HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On (2) this device must accept any
the Internet, go to interference received, including
You should erase all three codes www.homelink.com. interference that may cause undesired

Features
before selling the vehicle. operation.
HomeLink is a registered
Retraining a Button trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. Changes or modifications not expressly
To train an already programmed approved by the party responsible for
HomeLink button with a new device, compliance could void the user’s
you do not have to erase all the authority to operate the equipment.
memory. Train the selected button
over the existing memory code This device complies with Industry
following the steps under ‘‘Training Canada Standard RSS-210.
HomeLink’’. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.

159
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth Wireless Technology Phonebook


HandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL uses Bluetooth is a registered trademark The HFL can store up to 50 names
Bluetooth technology as a wireless of Bluetooh SIG, Inc. and phone numbers in its phonebook.
link between it and your Bluetooth Bluetooth is the wireless technology With a linked phone, you can then
compatible cell phone. When you are that links your phone to the HFL. automatically dial any name or
in your vehicle and your phone is The HFL uses a Class 3 Bluetooth, number in the phonebook.
linked to the HFL, you’ll enjoy safe, which means the maximum range Here are the main components of
hands-free phone use. The HFL is between your phone and vehicle is the HFL system:
available only in English. 30 feet (10 meters).
Microphone
Here are the main features of the To use the HFL, your phone must The HFL microphone is on the
HFL. Instructions for using the HFL have Bluetooth capability along with ceiling, between the front map lights
begin on page 162 . the Hands Free Profile. This type of and the console buttons. On models
phone is available through many with navigation system, the
Voice Control phone makers and cellular carriers. microphone is shared with the
HFL recognizes simple voice You can also find a phone by visiting navigation system.
commands, such as phone numbers www.acura.com. In Canada, visit
and names. It uses these commands www.acura.ca. Audio System
to automatically dial, receive, and When the HFL is in use, the sound
store numbers. For more Incoming/Outgoing Calls comes through the vehicle’s front
information on voice control, see With a linked phone, the HFL allows audio system speakers. If the audio
Using Voice Control on page 162 . you to send and receive calls in your system is in use while making a call,
vehicle without holding the phone. the HFL over-rides the audio system.
To change the volume level, use the
audio system volume knob.

160
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

Touring model with Navigation System Here is the function of each HFL
HFL Buttons button:
HFL TALK/BCK BUTTON HFL Talk: This button is used before ROAM STATUS SIGNAL
you give a command, to answer STLENGTH
incoming calls, and to confirm
system information.

Features
HFL Back: This button is used to
end a call, go back to the previous
voice control command, and to
NAVIGATION SYSTEM BUTTON* cancel an operation.

Refer to your navigation system
Manual. PHONE

To operate the HFL, use the HFL This information is displayed


TALK/BACK button on the left side whether or not the phone is being
of the steering wheel. used:

Phone − Indicates a phone is


currently linked to the HFL.

CONTINUED

161
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

Signal Strength* (models without How to Use the HFL command a second time, its
navigation system) − Indicates The HFL is operated by the HFL response is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If it
the network signal strength of the TALK/BACK button on the left side doesn’t recognize the command a
current phone call. Five bars of the steering wheel. The next few third time, it plays the Help
equals full signal strength. pages provide easy-to-use prompt.
instructions for all basic features of
ROAM Status* (models without the HFL. To hear a list of available options
navigation system) − Indicates NOTE: All phones may not at any time, press the top of the
your phone is roaming. operate identically, and some may TALK/BACK button, wait for the
cause inconsistent operation of the beep, and say, ‘‘Hands free link
* : Some phones will not send this HFL. help.’’
information to the HFL. Using Voice Control
Here are some guidelines for using Many commands can be spoken
voice control: together. For example, you can
say, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’
To enter a command, press the top
of the TALK/BACK button. Then, To enter a string of numbers in a
after the beep, say your command Call or Dial command, you can say
in a clear, natural tone. them all at once, or you can
For best system operation, set the separate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,
climate control fan speed to low, 10, and 11.
and direct the center vents away
from the microphone in the ceiling. To skip a voice prompt, press the
If the HFL does not recognize a Talk button while the HFL is
command, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’ speaking. The HFL will then begin
If it doesn’t recognize the listening for your next command.

162
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

To go back one step in a command the Talk button, you will be at the beep, say the four-digit passcode
process, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or press main menu. you want to use. For example, say
the Back button. ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL response is
If nothing is said while the HFL is Setting Your Passcode ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’
listening for a command, the HFL The HFL will accept a numeric, four-
will time out and stop its voice digit passcode that you can use for 5. Press and release the top of the
recognition. The next time you security purposes. TALK/BACK button. After the
press the top of the TALK/BACK beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL

Features
button, the HFL begins listening To set your passcode, do this: response is ‘‘The new passcode
from the point at which it timed 1. With the ignition in the ON (II) has been stored. Returning to the
out. position, press and release the top main menu.’’
of the TALK/BACK button on the
To end a command sequence at steering wheel. After the beep, say Locking or Unlocking the HFL
any time, press and hold the Back ‘‘Security.’’ The HFL response is Once a passcode is set, you can lock
button, or press the Talk button, ‘‘Security options are lock, unlock, the HFL so it only operates after the
wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’ and set passcode.’’ passcode is entered, or you can
The next time you press the Talk 2. Press and release the top of the unlock it so anyone using your
button, the HFL begins from its TALK/BACK button. After the vehicle can also use the HFL.
main menu. beep, say ‘‘Set passcode.’’
3. The HFL response is ‘‘What is the To lock or unlock the HFL, do this:
When you finish a command new four-digit passcode?’’ (If you 1. Press and release the top of the
sequence, the HFL goes back to are changing the passcode, you TALK/BACK button. After the
its main menu. For example, when will first be asked for the current beep, say ‘‘Security.’’ The HFL
you store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ the passcode.) response is ‘‘Security options are
HFL response is, ‘‘Eric has been 4. Press and release the top of the lock, unlock, and set passcode.’’
stored.’’ The next time you press TALK/BACK button. After the CONTINUED

163
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

2. Press and release the top of the Setting Up the System call?’’
TALK/BACK button. After the The voice of the HFL can be set to
beep, say ‘‘Lock’’ or ‘‘Unlock.’’ male or female (U.S. models only). 4. Press and release the top of the
Lock means the HFL will prompt Also, the incoming notification can TALK/BACK button. If you say
you for your passcode each time be set to a ring tone, a prompt, or no ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, the HFL
the ignition switch is turned to ON notification. response is, ‘‘Would you like a ring
(II) and you press the Talk button. tone or a prompt?’’ If you say ‘‘No’’
You will only be asked for the To set up the system, do this: after the beep, the HFL returns to
passcode once per ignition cycle. If 1. Press and release the top of the its main menu. Saying ‘‘No’’ will
the HFL is locked, its response is TALK/BACK button. After the result in no ring tone or prompt
‘‘System is locked. Each time the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The HFL playback during an incoming call.
vehicle is turned on, the passcode response is, ‘‘System options are The audio system will still mute,
will be required to use the system.’’ setup and clear.’’ and a message will be displayed.
If the HFL is unlocked, its 2. Press and release the top of the
response is ‘‘The system is TALK/BACK button. After the 5. Press and release the top of the
unlocked. Returning to the main beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ The HFL TALK/BACK button. After the
menu.’’ response is ‘‘Would you like male beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or ‘‘Prompt.’’
or female prompts?’’ If you choose ‘‘Ring tone’’ you will
3. Press and release the top of the hear a ring tone through the audio
TALK/BACK button. After the speakers to announce an incoming
beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or ‘‘Female,’’ call. If you choose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you
depending on the system voice will hear this message to
you want. The HFL response is, announce an incoming call: ‘‘You
‘‘Male (Female) prompts have have an incoming call.’’
been selected. Would you like an
audible notification of an incoming

164
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

Pairing Your Phone 1. With your phone on and the 4. Press and release the top of the
Your Bluetooth compatible phone ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or TALK/BACK button. After the
with HandsFree Profile must be ON (II) position, press and release beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The HFL
paired to the HFL before you can the Talk button. After the beep, response is ‘‘Searching for a
make and receive hands-free call. say ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFL Bluetooth phone.’’
response is ‘‘Phone set up options
NOTE: are status, pair, edit, delete, and NOTE: Steps 5 and 6 show a
HFL does not allow you to pair list.’’ common way to get your phone into

Features
your phone if the vehicle is its Discovery mode. If these steps do
moving. 2. Press and release the top of the not work on your phone, refer to the
For pairing, your phone must be in TALK/BACK button. After the phone’s operating manual.
its Discovery mode. beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ The HFL
Up to six phones can be paired to response is ‘‘The pairing process 5. Follow the prompts on your phone
the HFL. requires operation of your mobile to get it into its Search mode. The
The following procedure works for phone. For safety, only perform phone will search for the HFL.
most phones. If you cannot pair this function while the vehicle is When it comes up, select
your phone to the HFL with this stopped. State a four-digit code for HandsFreeLink from the list of
procedure, refer to your phone’s pairing. Note this code. It will be options displayed on your phone.
operating manual, or talk to your requested by the phone.’’
phone retailer. 6. When asked by the phone, enter
During the pairing process, turn 3. Press and release the top of the the four-digit code from step 3 into
off any previously paired phones TALK/BACK button. After the your phone. The HFL response is
before pairing a new phone. beep, say the four-digit code you ‘‘A new phone has been found.
want to use. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, What would you like to name this
3, 4.’’ The HFL response is, ‘‘1, 2, 3, phone?’’
4. Is this correct?’’ CONTINUED

165
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

7. Press and release the top of the To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:
TALK/BACK button. After the 1. Press and release the top of the 1. Press and release the top of the
beep, say the name you want to TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the
use. For example, say ‘‘Eric’s beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL
phone.’’ The HFL response is response is ‘‘Phone setup options response is, ‘‘Phone setup options
‘‘Eric’s phone has been are status, pair, edit, delete, and are status, pair, edit, delete, and
successfully paired. Returning to list.’’ list.’’
the main menu.’’ 2. Press and release the top of the 2. Press and release the top of the
TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the
8. If you want to pair another phone, beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The HFL beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The HFL
repeat steps 1 through 7. response is ‘‘Which phone would response is, ‘‘Which phone would
you like to edit?’’ you like to delete?’’
3. Press and release the top of the 3. Press and release the top of the
TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the
beep, say the name of the phone beep, say the name of the phone
you want to rename. For example, you want to delete. For example
say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL
response is ‘‘What is the new response is ‘‘Would you like to
name for Eric’s phone?’’ delete Eric’s phone?’’
4. Press and release the top of the 4. Press and release the top of the
TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the
beep, say the new name of the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL
phone. For example, say ‘‘Lisa’s response is ‘‘Preparing to delete
phone.’’ The HFL response is, Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ to
‘‘The name has been changed. continue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’
Returning to the main menu.’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’

166
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

5. Press and release the top of the To find out the status of the phone being To change from the currently linked
TALK/BACK button. If you say used, do this: phone to another paired phone, do this:
‘‘OK’’ after the beep, the HFL 1. Press and release the top of the 1. Press and release the top of the
response is ‘‘The phone has been TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the
deleted. Returning to the main beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’ The HFL
menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’ or response is ‘‘Phone setup options response is ‘‘Searching for the
‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not be are status, pair, edit, delete, and next phone.’’ The HFL then
deleted. list.’’ disconnects the linked phone and

Features
searches for another paired phone.
To list all paired phones, do this: 2. Press and release the top of the If no other phones are found, the
1. Press and release the top of the TALK/BACK button. After the first phone remains linked.
TALK/BACK button. After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ An example of
beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’ The HFL the HFL response is, ‘‘Eric’s phone
response is ‘‘Phone setup options is linked. Battery strength is three
are status, pair, edit, delete, and bars. Signal strength is five bars,
list.’’ and the phone is roaming.
Returning to the main menu.’’
2. Press and release the top of the
TALK/BACK button. After the
beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The HFL
responds by listing the name of
each paired phone. When all
phones paired to the system have
been read, the HFL response is
‘‘The entire list has been read.
Returning to the main menu.’’

167
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

Making a Call 3. Press and release the top of the HFL response is ‘‘Would you like
You can make calls using any phone TALK/BACK button. After the to call Eric?’’
number, or by using a name in the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The 3. Press and release the Talk button.
HFL phonebook. You can also redial HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The top
the last number called. During a call, ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, you of the TALK/BACK response is
the HFL allows you to talk up to 30 will hear the person you called ‘‘Calling’’ or ‘‘Dialing.’’ Once
minutes after you remove the key through the audio speakers. To connected, you will hear the
from the ignition switch. change the volume, use the audio person you called through the
system volume knob. audio speakers. To change the
To make a call using a phone number, 4. To end the call, press the bottom volume, use the audio system
do this: of the TALK/BACK button. volume knob.
1. With your phone on and the 4. To end the call, press the bottom
ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or To make a call using a name in the HFL of the TALK/BACK button.
ON (II) position, press and release phonebook, do this:
the top of the TALK/BACK 1. With your phone on and the To redial the last number called by
button. After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ ignition in the ACCESSORY (I) or the phone, press and release the top
or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL response is, ON (II) position, press and release of the TALK/BACK button. After
‘‘What name or number would you the top of the TALK/BACK the beep, say ‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL
like to call/dial?’’ button. After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ response is, ‘‘Redialing.’’ Once
2. Press and release the top of the or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFL response is connected, you will hear the person
TALK/BACK button. After the ‘‘What name or number would you you called through the audio
beep, say the number you want to like to call/dial?’’ speakers. To change the volume, use
call. For example, say ‘‘123 456 2. Press and release the top of the the audio system volume knob.
7891.’’ The HFL response is ‘‘123 TALK/BACK button. After the
456 7891. Say call, dial, or continue beep, say the name you want to
to add numbers.’’ call. For example, say ‘‘Eric.’’ The

168
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

Sending Numbers or Names 3. Press and release the top of the Receiving a Call
During a Call TALK/BACK button. After the If you receive a call when you are not
The HFL allow you to send numbers beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The dial tones on the phone, the HFL interrupts the
or names during a call. This is useful will be sent, and the call will audio system (if it is on), and plays
when you call a menu-driven phone continue. the incoming call notification, if
system. You can also program activated. To answer the call, press
account numbers into the HFL To send a name during a call, do this: the top of the TALK/BACK button
phonebook for easy retrieval during 1. Press and release the top of the and begin speaking. If you don’t want

Features
menu-driven calls. TALK/BACK button. After the to answer the call, press the Back
beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The HFL button.
To send a number during a call, do this: response is ‘‘What name or
1. Press and release the top of the number would you like to send?’’ If your phone has Call Waiting, and
TALK/BACK button. After the 2. Press and release the top of the you receive a call when you are on
beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The HFL TALK/BACK button. After the the phone, press the Talk button to
response is, ‘‘What name or beep, say the name you want to answer it. When you do this, the
number would you like to send?’’ send. For example, say ‘‘Account original call is placed on hold. To
2. Press and release the top of the number.’’ The HFL response is return to the original call, press the
TALK/BACK button. After the ‘‘Would you like to send account top of the TALK/BACK button
beep, say the number you want to number?’’ again. If you don’t want to answer
send. For example, say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ 3. Press and release the top of the the new call, disregard it, and
The HFL response is ‘‘1, 2, 3. Say TALK/BACK button. After the continue with your original call. If
send, or continue to add numbers.’’ beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ The dial tones you want to hang up the original call
will be sent, and the call will and answer the new call, press the
continue. bottom of the TALK/BACK button.

169
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

Transferring a Call To mute your voice, do this: To add a name, do this:


During a call, you can transfer it 1. Press and release the top of the 1. Press and release the top of the
from the HFL to your phone, or from TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the
your phone to the HFL. beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The HFL beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL
response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’ response is ‘‘Phonebook options
To transfer a call from the HFL to your are store, edit, delete, and list.’’
phone, do this: To unmute your voice, do this: 2. Press and release the top of the
Press and release the top of the 2. Press and release the top of the TALK/BACK button. After the
TALK/BACK button. After the beep, TALK/BACK button. After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ The HFL
say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The audio switches beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ The HFL 3. response is, ‘‘What name would
from the HFL to the phone. response is, ‘‘Mute is cancelled.’’ you like to store?’’
Press and release the top of the
To transfer a call from your phone to the Setting up the Phonebook TALK/BACK button. After the
HFL, do this: The HFL phonebook can store up to beep, say the name you would like
Press and release the top of the 50 names with their associated to store. For example, say ‘‘Eric’’
TALK/BACK button. After the beep, numbers. These can be any types of or say ‘‘account number.’’ The
say ‘‘Transfer.’’ The audio switches numbers. For example, you can store HFL response is ‘‘What is the
from your phone to the HFL. a phone number and use it to make a number for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is the
call, or you can store an account number for account number?’’
Muting a Call number and use it during a call to a 4. Press and release the top of the
During a call, you can mute or menu-driven phone system. TALK/BACK button. After the
unmute your voice to the person you beep, say the number. For
are talking to. example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The
HFL response is ‘‘123 456 7891.’’

170
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

5. Press and release the top of the 4. Press and release the top of the 3. Press and release the top of the
TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the
beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The HFL beep, say the new number for Eric. beep, say the name you would like
response is ‘‘Eric (or account For example, say ‘‘987 654 3219.’’ to delete. For example, say ‘‘Eric.’’
number) has been stored. The HFL response is, ‘‘987 654 The HFL response is ‘‘Do you
Returning to the main menu.’’ 3219.’’ want to delete Eric?’’
5. Press and release the top of the 4. Press and release the top of the
To edit the number of a name, do this: TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the

Features
1. Press and release the top of the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ The HFL beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL
TALK/BACK button. After the response is ‘‘The number has been response is, ‘‘The name has been
beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL changed. Returning to the main deleted. Returning to the main
response is ‘‘Phonebook options menu.’’ menu.’’
are store, edit, delete, and list.’’
2. Press and release the top of the To delete a name, do this: To list all names in the phonebook, do
TALK/BACK button. After the 1. Press and release the top of the this:
beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ The HFL TALK/BACK button. After the 1. Press and release the top of the
response is, ‘‘What name would beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL TALK/BACK button. After the
you like to edit?’’ response is, ‘‘Phonebook options beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL
3. Press and release the top of the are store, edit, delete, and list.’’ response is, ‘‘The Phonebook
TALK/BACK button. After the 2. Press and release the top of the options are store, edit, delete, and
beep, say the name you would like TALK/BACK button. After the list.’’
to edit. For example, say ‘‘Eric.’’ beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ The HFL
The HFL response is ‘‘What is the response is, ‘‘What name would
new number for Eric?’’ you like to delete?’’

CONTINUED

171
Main Menu Table of Contents

HandsFreeLinkTM

2. Press and release the top of the like to call Eric?’’ 2. Press and release the top of the
TALK/BACK button. After the TALK/BACK button. After the
beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The HFL 3. Press and release the top of the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ The HFL
responds by listing the names in TALK/BACK button. After the response is, ‘‘This process will
the phonebook. When the end of beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL clear all paired phones, clear all
the list is reached, the HFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Once entries in the phonebook, and
response is, ‘‘The entire list has connected, you will hear the clear the passcode. Is this what
been read. Returning to the main person you called through the you would like to do?’’
menu.’’ audio speakers. To change the 3. Press and release the top of the
volume, use the audio system TALK/BACK button. After the
To call a name from the phonebook list, volume knob. beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ The HFL
do this: response is ‘‘Preparing to clear all
1. Press and release the top of the Clearing the System paired phones, all phonebook
TALK/BACK button. After the This operation clears the HFL of entries, and the passcode. This
beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’ The HFL your passcode, your paired phones, may take up to 2 minutes to
response is ‘‘Phonebook options and all names in the HFL phonebook. complete.’’ Press and release the
are store, edit, delete, and list.’’ Clearing is recommended before you top of the TALK/BACK button.
2. Press and release the top of the sell your vehicle. After the beep, say ‘‘OK’’ to
TALK/BACK button. After the proceed, or say ‘‘Go back’’ or
beep, say ‘‘List.’’ The HFL To clear the system, do this: ‘‘Cancel.’’
responds by listing the names in 1. Press and release the top of the 4. If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a short
the phonebook. When it says the TALK/BACK button. After the period of time, the HFL response
name you want to call, for example, beep, say ‘‘System.’’ The HFL is, ‘‘System has been cleared.
Eric, press the top of the TALK/ response is, ‘‘System options are Returning to the main menu.’’
BACK button, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ setup and clear.’’
The HFL response is, ‘‘Would you

172
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

U.S. Touring model with Navigation The Directions and Connections OnStar Control Panel
System Plan provides these additional
The OnStar system in your vehicle features: CALL ANSWER/ OnStar
CALL END BUTTON BUTTON
gives you access to a wide range of Route Support
services and information with the Ride Assist
touch of a button. An OnStar advisor Information and Convenience
is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a Services
week.

Features
The Safe and Sound Plan provides The Luxury and Leisure Plan adds
these features: personal concierge services.
Roadside Assistance VOICE
ACTIVATED SYSTEM
Emergency Services KEYPAD STATUS
Automatic Notification of Airbag EMERGENCY BUTTON INDICATOR
Deployment
Accident Assist The OnStar buttons and indicator
Remote Door Locking/Unlocking are located on the ceiling near the
Stolen Vehicle Tracking front map lights.
Misplaced Vehicle Assistance
Online Concierge Services.

173
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

OnStar Services Button To cancel these retries, press the To record a message:
CALL ANSWER/CALL END button. During your call, the Advisor or
Press this button to contact an Virtual Advisor, press and release
OnStar advisor. You will hear a A microphone is located on the the OnStar button. The system
chime, followed by the ceiling, between the front map lights beeps to indicate that it is
announcement, ‘‘Connecting to and the console buttons you can recording.
OnStar.’’ The connection should take speak to the advisor without taking When you are finished recording,
20 to 30 seconds. The advisor will your hands off the steering wheel or press and release the OnStar
assist you with any of the services diverting your attention from the button again. The system beeps
included in your plan. road. The OnStar advisor’s voice and stops recording.
comes from the audio system’s
Depending on what service you speakers. Use the volume control on To hear the first playback of a
request, you may need to give your the audio system or on the steering message:
Personal Identification Number wheel to adjust the volume. Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL
(PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is a END button. The system responds
number you make up and provide Recording an Advisor or Virtual with ‘‘OnStar replay.’’
when you establish your OnStar Advisor Message Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ The
service. You can record up to 5 minutes of recorded message is played
information from your OnStar through the audio system
If cellular telephone service is not advisor or the Virtual Advisor. This speakers.
available in the area you are driving is helpful for reviewing the route, When you are finished listening,
in, you will hear a fast busy signal. hotel, or restaurant information you press the CALL ANSWER/CALL
The system will retry the connection receive from the OnStar center. END button. The system responds
several times before returning to the with ‘‘Goodbye.’’
ready mode.

174
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

To hear a message again: Emergency Button Voice Activated Keypad


Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL
END button. The system responds Press this button to contact an Press the ‘‘phone♯’’ button to send
with ‘‘OnStar replay.’’ OnStar advisor only if you have an dial tones (example − automated
Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ The emergency situation. You will hear a phone systems) while in an OnStar
system responds with ‘‘Play or tone, followed by the announcement, personal call.
Resume.’’ ‘‘Connecting to OnStar Emergency.’’
If you say ‘‘Play,’’ the message Your call is given highest priority.

Features
plays from the beginning. If you
say ‘‘Resume,’’ the message plays The advisor will ask about the nature
from the point you previously of the emergency, locate your
stopped it. vehicle, and notify the appropriate
emergency service agencies.
Recording a new message will delete
the previous message. Call Answer/Call End
Button
Press this CALL ANSWER/CALL
END button to end a call to the
OnStar advisor. If the OnStar center
calls you, press this button to answer
the call.

This button is also used to initiate


the Personal Calling and Virtual
Advisor services, if you have
subscribed.

175
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

System Status Indicator Safe and Sound Plan Features Automatic Notification of Airbag
This indicator shows you the status The OnStar system uses the Global Deployment − If you are ever in an
of the system. Positioning System (GPS) to locate accident that causes the airbags to
your vehicle whenever you place a deploy, the OnStar system
Solid Green − The system is ready call. This allows the advisor to automatically places a call (provided
for use. quickly contact the nearest services the OnStar system and your vehicle’s
without requiring you to provide electrical system are still intact). The
Blinking Green − A call is in detailed directions. advisor will attempt to speak to you
progress. to evaluate the situation, and contact
Roadside Assistance − Contact the nearest emergency services
Solid Red − There is a problem the OnStar advisor if you need provider.
with the system. Press the OnStar assistance with a problem (flat tire,
button to contact an advisor. If the out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. The Accident Assist − The OnStar
call connects, the advisor will assist advisor will contact an appropriate advisor can help you if you are ever
you with verifying the system’s agency to come and assist you. in a minor accident by asking you for
operation. If you are not able to information about the accident.
contact an advisor, take your vehicle Emergency Services − Contact an Complete, detailed information will
to an Acura dealer to have the OnStar advisor if you have an make it easier to complete accident
system diagnosed. emergency situation. The advisor reports and insurance claims.
will contact the nearest emergency
Blinking Red − There is a problem services provider (ambulance, fire
with the system while a call is in department, etc.) and advise them of
progress. your situation.

176
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

Remote Door Locking/Unlocking Misplaced Vehicle Assistance − Directions and Connections Plan
− By sending a signal to your If you are unable to locate your Features
vehicle, the advisor can lock or vehicle in a large parking lot or The Directions and Connections
unlock your vehicle’s doors. This is parking structure, contact OnStar at Plan provides these additional
helpful if you are away from your (888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor will features.
vehicle and realize you forgot to lock remotely activate the exterior lights
the doors, or if you have locked the and the horn, allowing you to locate Route Support − The OnStar
keys in your vehicle. To get OnStar’s your vehicle. advisor can give you verbal

Features
assistance, call (888) 4-ONSTAR directions from your current location
(466-7827). Online Concierge Services − to a desired destination.
From your computer, you can log
Stolen Vehicle Tracking − Using into www. myonstar.com to make Ride Assist − If you need a ride
GPS, OnStar can locate your vehicle dinner reservations, purchase tickets (taxi, limousine service, etc.) the
almost anywhere. If your vehicle is to events, send flowers, etc. OnStar advisor can make the
ever stolen, contact OnStar at (888) arrangements for you. Use the
4-ONSTAR. The advisor will put you OnStar button, or call
in contact with the proper authorities, (888) 4-ONSTAR.
and assist them with locating your
vehicle. Information and Convenience
Services − The OnStar advisor can
give you information on nearby
hotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals,
gas stations, and many other
services in any area you are traveling
in. The advisor can also help you
with hotel or restaurant reservations.

177
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

Luxury and Leisure Plan Personal Calling Placing a Telephone Call − You
Features The OnStar Personal Calling plan is must use voice commands to give
The Luxury and Leisure plan an extra-cost option that gives you the OnStar system your calling
provides all the benefits of the other the ability to use your vehicle’s information. To make a phone call:
plans, and adds: OnStar system as a hands-free
cellular telephone. Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL
Personal Concierge Services − END button.
An OnStar advisor can assist you To sign up for Personal Calling, OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
with purchasing theater tickets, press the OnStar button in your ready.’’
airline tickets, rental car reservations vehicle, and notify the advisor that Say ‘‘Dial.’’
for a vacation, and just about any you’d like to sign up. The advisor will OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phone
other purchase you desire. get all the information needed to set number to dial, please.’’
up your account, and provide you Say the entire number without
with your new cellular telephone pausing.
number. OnStar will repeat the number,
You will need to provide a credit card and then say ‘‘Yes or No.’’
number, and prepurchase ‘‘units’’ or Say ‘‘Yes’’ to dial the number, or
minutes of air time (one unit equals ‘‘No’’ to try again.
1 minute). OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing.’’
It will then place the telephone call.
When you have finished your
conversation, press the CALL
ANSWER/CALL END button
again to hang up.

178
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

If you make a mistake speaking the You can also enter the number one If you make a mistake speaking a
phone number, or the system digit at a time. To make a phone call: digit of the phone number, or the
responds with the wrong number, system responds with the wrong
say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause the Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL digit, say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause the
system to erase the number. END button. system to erase the last digit.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
If you need to cancel the phone call ready.’’ If you need to cancel the phone call
attempt before entering the Say ‘‘Digit dial.’’ attempt before entering the

Features
complete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘First complete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’
The system will cancel the operation digit to dial, please.’’ The system will cancel the operation
and return to Ready. Say the first digit of the number. and return to Ready.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Always wait for OnStar to confirm
the digit before going to the next
digit.
Say the second digit of the number.
OnStar will repeat that digit.
Continue this until you have given
OnStar the complete telephone
number. Then say ‘‘Dial.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing.’’
It will then place the telephone call.
When you have finished your
conversation, press the CALL
ANSWER/CALL END button
again to hang up. CONTINUED

179
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

If the system has difficulty the digit before going to the next recall the number by giving the
understanding a voice command, it digit. system the nametag.
can respond with: OnStar will repeat that digit.
Say the second digit of the number. Storing a Nametag − To store a
‘‘Pardon’’ − The system could not Continue this until you have given telephone number and its nametag in
match your voice command to one it OnStar the complete number. the system:
knows. Repeat the command Then say ‘‘Send.’’ OnStar will send
distinctly. the number by dial tones. Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL
END button.
‘‘Slower please’’ − The system Incoming Telephone Calls − OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’
missed the command because it was When someone places a telephone Say ‘‘Store.’’
not ready for it, or there was too call to you, the audio system will OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phone
much background noise. Repeat the mute and you will hear the ring. number to store, please.’’
command after a short pause. Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL Say the entire number.
END button to answer the call. OnStar will repeat the number,
Voice Activated Key-Pad − You When you have completed the call, and then say ‘‘Yes or No.’’
can send dial tones during OnStar press the CALL ANSWER/CALL Say ‘‘Yes,’’ or say ‘‘No’’ to try again.
Personal Calling. END button again to hang up. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name
While in a personal call, press the tag, please.’’
Voice Activated Key-Pad Button. Using Nametags Say the name that you want
OnStar will respond with ‘‘First The OnStar system can store up to assigned to that telephone number.
digit to send please.’’ twenty 32-digit telephone numbers in
Say the first digit of the number its memory. When you store these
you want to send. numbers in its memory, you give
OnStar will repeat that digit. each one a nametag. When you want
Always wait for OnStar to confirm to place a telephone call, you can

180
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

You can also store a telephone Placing a Telephone Call − To Deleting a Name tag − To delete a
number and its name tag one digit at place a telephone call using a name name tag and telephone number
a time. To store them in the system: tag: from memory:

Press the VOICE ACTIVATED Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL
KEYPAD button. END button. END button.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’
ready.’’ Say ‘‘Call.’’ Say ‘‘Delete.’’

Features
Say ‘‘Digit store.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name
OnStar will respond with ‘‘First tag, please.’’ tag, please.’’
digit to store, please.’’ Say the name tag for the number Say the name tag for the number
Say the first digit of the number. you want to call. you want to delete.
OnStar will repeat that digit. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Calling OnStar will respond with ‘‘Delete
Say the second digit of the number. <name tag>,’’ then place the <name tag>, Yes or No.’’
Continue this until you have given telephone call. Say ‘‘Yes.’’
OnStar the complete telephone OnStar will respond with ‘‘Deleting
number. Then say ‘‘Store’’ again. If you have forgotten what name <name tag>.’’
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Name tags you have stored, the system will
tag, please.’’ read them to you. Press the CALL
Say ‘‘New nametag.’’ ANSWER/CALL END button. When
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Store the system responds with ‘‘Ready,’’
<new nametag>, Yes or No.’’ say ‘‘Directory.’’
Say ‘‘Yes.’’
(or ‘‘No’’ to try again)
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Storing
<nametag>.’’ CONTINUED

181
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

Redialing a Number − To redial Say the first digit of the code. Say ‘‘Units.’’
the last telephone number you OnStar will repeat that digit. OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify
called: Say the second digit of the code. or add.’’
Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL OnStar will repeat that digit. Say ‘‘Verify.’’
END button. Say the third digit of the code. OnStar will respond with ‘‘You
OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ OnStar will repeat that digit. have <number> units remaining.’’
Say ‘‘Redial.’’ Say the fourth digit of the code. Adding Units − To purchase more
OnStar will respond with OnStar will respond with ‘‘Security units of cellular air time:
‘‘Redialing,’’ then place the is ON/OFF.’’ Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL
telephone call. If you forget the security code END button.
entered, or someone else enters a OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar
Security Code security code unknown to you, you ready.’’
By giving the system a security code must contact an OnStar advisor to Say ‘‘Units.’’
that you make up, you can lock out reset the code. Press the OnStar OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verify
the Personal Calling and Virtual button, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR. or add.’’
Advisor capabilities of the system so Say ‘‘Add.’’
unauthorized people cannot make Keeping Track of Units OnStar will connect you to an
telephone calls. To turn security on You must prepurchase units automated system to handle your
or off: (minutes) of cellular air time. The purchase.
Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL OnStar system tracks how many It is also possible to press the
END button. units you have remaining. Onstar button and talk to an
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar To find out how many units you have advisor to purchase more air time.
ready.’’ remaining: You can also call OnStar at
Say ‘‘Security.’’ Press the CALL ANSWER/CALL (888) 4-ONSTAR, or get information
OnStar will respond with ‘‘First END button. about your account at the OnStar
digit of security code, please.’’ OnStar will respond with ‘‘Ready.’’ web site, www.onstar.com.

182
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

OnStar Virtual Advisor If you do not have Internet access, a Personal Identification Number
When you subscribe to Personal default profile can be set up for you. You make up and provide your
Calling, you can also enjoy the Personal Identification Number
benefits of Virtual Advisor. This To use the Virtual Advisor from your (PIN) when you establish your
feature lets you hear information in vehicle: account with OnStar. You should
your vehicle about weather, sports, write down your PIN, and keep it
news, and stocks. Press the white phone button. with you at all times.
OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStar

Features
Although Virtual Advisor can ready.’’ You can change your PIN at any time.
provide information on many Say ‘‘Virtual Advisor.’’ Contact the OnStar advisor by
subjects, you can set up a pressing the OnStar button, or by
customized profile with OnStar that The system will connect you to the calling (888) 4-ONSTAR.
makes it easier to get information Virtual Advisor. The Virtual Advisor
about areas that are of specific will prompt you for the information If you forget your PIN, contact the
interest to you. To do this, you must you desire. OnStar advisor. For security reasons,
go to the OnStar web site, your PIN will be mailed to you.
www.onstar.com. This is a secure If you would like to hear a list of
site; you will need your account voice commands that are available,
number and PIN to access your say ‘‘What are my choices.’’ OnStar
account information and to design is continually upgrading the system,
your customized profile. so new commands may become
available.

183
Main Menu Table of Contents

OnStar

System Limitations When you turn off your vehicle’s As required by the FCC: This device
OnStar uses the Global Positioning ignition, the OnStar system goes into complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
System (GPS) to locate your vehicle low-power mode. After 48 hours, it Operation is subject to the following two
for functions such as route guidance switches to sleep mode to conserve conditions: (1) This device may not
and roadside assistance. GPS is your vehicle’s battery power. cause harmful interference, and (2) this
affected by structures that can Features such as remote door device must accept any interference
obstruct the signal, such as tunnels, unlocking and misplaced vehicle received, including interference that
parking structures, and tall buildings. assistance will not work after your may cause undesired operation.
It may not be possible for OnStar to vehicle has been parked for more
pinpoint your location if you are in or than 48 hours. Changes or modifications not expressly
near such structures. approved by the party responsible for
OnStar is a registered trademark of compliance could void the user’s
OnStar uses cellular technology to the OnStar Corporation. authority to operate the equipment.
communicate with your vehicle.
Cellular coverage varies by location, This device complies with Industry
which may affect the ability to Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
establish a connection, or the quality subject to the following two conditions:
of the connection. (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
OnStar has an antenna on the roof of accept any interference that may cause
the vehicle. To avoid reception undesired operation of the device.
problems, do not cover this antenna.

184
Main Menu

Before Driving

Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 186


vehicle, you should know what Gasoline Type ................................ 186
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 187
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 187
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing the
luggage or packages. The hood......................................... 188
information in this section will help Oil Check .................................... 189
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check .............. 190
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ................................ 190
read the information in this section Accessories and Modifications .... 191

Before Driving
first. Carrying Cargo .............................. 193

185
Main Menu Table of Contents

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation Use of gasoline with these additives


Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate may adversely affect performance,
reliability and performance by paying on premium unleaded gasoline with a and cause the Malfunction Indicator
extra attention to how you drive pump octane number of 91 or higher. Lamp on your instrument panel to
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). Use of a lower octane gasoline can come on. If this happens, contact
During this period: cause occasional metallic knocking your authorized Acura dealer for
noises in the engine and will result in service.
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid decreased engine performance.
acceleration. Some gasoline today is blended with
Use of a gasoline with a pump octane oxygenates such as ethanol or
Avoid hard braking for the first less than 86 can lead to engine MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
200 miles (300 km). damage. operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 percent ethanol
Do not change the oil until the We recommended using a quality by volume and up to 15 percent
scheduled maintenance time. gasoline containing detergent MTBE by volume. Do not use
additives that help prevent fuel gasoline containing methanol.
Do not tow a trailer. system and engine deposits.
If you notice any undesirable
You should also follow these In addition, in order to maintain good operating symptoms, try another
recommendations with an performance, fuel economy, and service station or switch to another
overhauled or exchanged engine, or emissions control, we strongly brand of gasoline.
when the brakes are replaced. recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that For further important fuel-related
does NOT contain manganese-based information, please refer to your
fuel additives such as MMT. Quick Start Guide.

186
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service Station Procedure

Refueling 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.


You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes. Gasoline is highly flammable
Place the cap in the holder on the and explosive. You can be
Pull
fuel fill door. burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do Stop the engine and keep
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave heat, sparks, and flame away.
some room for the fuel to expand Handle fuel only outdoors.

Before Driving
with temperature changes. Wipe up spills immediately.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off even


though the tank is not full, there may
1. Park with the driver’s side closest be a problem with your vehicle’s fuel
to the service station pump. vapor recovery system. The system
helps keep fuel vapors from going
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling into the atmosphere. Consult your
on the handle to the left of the dealer.
driver’s seat.

FUEL FILL CAP

CONTINUED

187
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service Station Procedure

5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Opening and Closing the Hood
until it clicks at least three times.
If you do not properly tighten the HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
cap, the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp may come on (see page
273 ).

6. Push the fuel fill door closed until


it latches.

LATCH

1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers under the front
parking brake. Pull the hood edge of the hood near the center.
release handle located under the Slide your hand to your left until
lower left corner of the dashboard. you feel the hood latch handle.
The hood will pop up slightly. Push this handle up until it
releases the hood. Lift the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,


or if you can open the hood without
lifting the handle, the mechanism
should be cleaned and lubricated.

188
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service Station Procedure

3. Lift the hood up most of the way. Oil Check


The hydraulic supports will lift it
up the rest of the way and hold it
up.

To close the hood, lower the hood to


about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then press down firmly with
your hands. Make sure it is securely
latched.

Before Driving
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK

Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and
engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks.

2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower mark,
cloth or paper towel. see Adding Oil on page 237 .

3. Insert it all the way back in its hole.

189
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy

Engine Coolant Check Improving Fuel Economy Try to maintain a constant speed.
Always maintain your vehicle Every time you slow down and
RESERVE TANK according to the maintenance speed up, your vehicle uses extra
schedule. See Owner’s fuel. Use the cruise control when
Maintenance Checks (see page appropriate.
230 ).
Combine several short trips into
For example, an underinflated tire one.
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
MAX which uses more fuel. The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
MIN
The build-up of snow or mud on use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
your vehicle’s underside adds ventilation when possible.
weight and rolling resistance.
Look at the coolant level in the Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is mileage and reduces the chance of
between the MAX and MIN lines. If corrosion.
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 240 for Drive moderately. Rapid
information on adding the proper acceleration, abrupt cornering and
coolant. hard braking use more fuel.

Refer to Owner’s Maintenance Always drive in the highest gear


Checks on page 230 for information possible.
about checking other items on your
vehicle.

190
Main Menu Table of Contents

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying your vehicle, or installing Before installing any accessory:


some non-Acura accessories, can
make your vehicle unsafe. Before Improper accessories or Make sure the accessory does not
you make any modifications or add modifications can affect your obscure any lights, or interfere
any accessories, be sure to read the vehicle’s handling, stability, and with proper vehicle operation or
following information. performance, and cause a performance.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Be sure electronic accessories do
Your dealer has Acura accessories not overload electrical circuits
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this (see page 280 ) or interfere with

Before Driving
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding proper operation of your vehicle.
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications.
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
Although aftermarket accessories When properly installed, cellular windows as these may interfere
may fit on your vehicle, they may not phones, alarms, two-way radios, and with proper operation of the side
meet factory specifications, and low-powered audio systems should curtain airbags.
could adversely affect your vehicle’s not interfere with your vehicle’s
handling and stability. computer controlled systems, such Before installing any accessory,
as your airbags, anti-lock brakes, and have the installer contact your
Tire Pressure Monitoring System. dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.

191
Main Menu Table of Contents

Accessories and Modifications

Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires


Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
or replacing components with your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
aftermarket components could other systems.
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
Some examples are: safety features can make the
Lowering your vehicle with an systems ineffective.
aftermarket suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground If you plan to modify your vehicle,
clearance can allow the consult your dealer.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with an


aftermarket suspension kit can
affect handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because they


are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire Pressure
Monitoring System.

192
Main Menu Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo

Your vehicle has several convenient


storage areas:
GLOVE BOX DOOR POCKETS
REAR COMPARTMENT Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the
second and third row seats when
folded flat
Console compartment
Rear compartment

Before Driving
Roof-rack (if equipped)

However, carrying too much cargo,


or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT SEAT-BACK POCKETS

CARGO AREA

193
Main Menu Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits 3. Subtract the combined weight of 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
The maximum load for your vehicle the driver and passengers from trailer, the load from your trailer
is 1,158 lbs (525 kg). This figure 1,158 lbs (525 kg). will be transferred to your vehicle.
includes the total weight of all Consult this manual to determine
occupants, cargo, and accessories, 4. The resulting figure equals the how this reduces the available
and the tongue load if you are towing available amount of cargo and cargo and luggage load capacity of
a trailer. luggage load capacity. your vehicle.

To determine the correct cargo and For example, if there will be five
luggage load limit: 150 lbs (70 kg) occupants in your
vehicle, the amount of available Overloading or improper
1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the cargo and luggage load capacity is loading can affect handling and
combined weight of occupants and 408 lbs (175 kg). stability and cause a crash in
cargo should never exceed 1,158 5 × 150 lbs (70 kg) = 750 lbs which you can be hurt or killed.
lbs (525 kg)’’ on your vehicle’s (350 kg)
placard (on the driver’s doorjamb). 1,158 lbs (525 kg) − 750 lbs (350 kg) Follow all load limits and other
= 408 lbs (175 kg) loading guidelines in this
2. Determine the combined weight manual.
of the driver and passengers that 5. Determine the combined weight
will be riding in your vehicle. of accessories, luggage, and cargo
being loaded in the vehicle. The
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4
[408 lbs (175 kg) in this example].

194
Main Menu Table of Contents

Carrying Cargo

Carrying Items in the Passenger Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area Optional Separation Net
Compartment or on a Roof Rack The separation net can be used to
Store or secure all items that could Distribute cargo evenly on the hold back soft, lightweight items
be thrown around and hurt floor of the cargo area, placing the stored in the cargo area. Heavy
someone during a crash. heaviest items on the bottom and items should be properly secured on
as far forward as possible. Tie the floor of the cargo area. The net
Be sure items placed on the floor down items that could be thrown may not prevent heavy items from
behind the front seats cannot roll about the vehicle during a crash or being thrown forward in a crash or a
under the seats and interfere with sudden stop. sudden stop.
the pedals or seat operation.

Before Driving
If you carry large items that Optional Cargo Cover
Keep the glove box closed while prevent you from closing the The cargo cover can be used to
driving. If it is open, a passenger tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the cover the cargo area behind the third
could injure their knees during a passenger area. To avoid the row seats. When the third row seats
crash or sudden stop. possibility of carbon monoxide are folded down, the cargo cover can
poisoning, follow the instructions be installed in a forward position and
If you fold down the second or on page 54 . extended over the larger cargo area.
third row seats, follow the Do not install the cargo cover in the
instructions above and be sure to If you carry any items on a roof forward position if the third row
keep all cargo near the windows rack, be sure the total weight of seats are not folded down.
below the bottom of the windows. the rack and the items does not
If cargo is higher, it could exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
interfere with proper operation of If you use an accessory roof rack,
the side curtain airbags. the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.

195
Main Menu

196
Main Menu

Driving

This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ......................... 198


starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ......................... 198
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine........................ 199
automatic transmission. It also Automatic Transmission............... 200
includes important information on Variable Torque Management
parking your vehicle, the braking 4WD System............................... 204
system, the VTM-4 System, the VSA VTM-4 Lock ............................... 204
system, Tire Pressure Monitoring Tire Pressure Monitoring System
System, and facts you need if you are (TPMS) ....................................... 205
planning to tow a trailer. Parking ............................................ 207
Braking System.............................. 208
Anti-lock Brakes ............................ 209

Driving
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System......................................... 211
Towing Weight Limits .................. 213
Towing a Trailer ............................ 214
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
Motorhome................................. 222
Off-Highway Guidelines ............... 223

197
Main Menu Table of Contents

Driving Guidelines, Preparing to Drive

Driving Guidelines Do not modify your vehicle in any 3. Check that any items you may be
Your vehicle has higher ground way that would raise the center of carrying are stored properly or
clearance that allows you to travel gravity. fastened down securely.
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good Do not carry heavy cargo on the 4. Check the seat adjustment (see
visibility so you can anticipate roof. page 86 ).
problems earlier.
See page 223 for additional guidelines 5. Check the adjustment of the
Because your vehicle rides higher for driving off-highway. inside and outside mirrors (see
off the ground, it has a high center page 95 ).
of gravity that can cause it to roll Preparing to Drive
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility You should do the following checks 6. Check the steering wheel
vehicles have a significantly higher and adjustments before you drive adjustment (see page 78 ).
roll over rate than other types of your vehicle.
vehicles. 7. Make sure the doors and tailgate
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, are securely closed and locked.
To prevent rollovers or loss of and outside lights are clean and
control: unobstructed. Remove frost, snow, 8. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
or ice. your passengers have fastened
Take corners at slower speeds their seat belts (see page 16 ).
than you would with a passenger 2. Visually check the tires. If a tire
vehicle. looks low, use a gauge to check its 9. When you start the engine, check
pressure. the gauges and indicators in the
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt instrument panel (see page 59 ).
maneuvers whenever possible.

198
Main Menu Table of Contents

Starting the Engine

1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 5. If the engine does not start within
pedal, turn the ignition key to the 15 seconds, or starts but stalls
2. In cold weather, turn off all START (III) position. Do not hold right away, repeat step 4 with the
electrical accessories to reduce the key in START (III) for more accelerator pedal pressed halfway
the drain on the battery. than 15 seconds at a time. If the down. If the engine starts, release
engine does not start right away, pressure on the accelerator pedal
3. Make sure the shift lever is in pause for at least 10 seconds so the engine does not race.
Park. Press on the brake pedal. before trying again.
6. If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
The immobilizer system protects your starting in order to clear flooding.

Driving
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly- If the engine still does not start,
coded key (or other device) is used, the return to step 5.
engine’s f uel system is disabled. See
Immobilizer System on page 80 .

The engine is harder to start in cold


weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.

199
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lever Position Indicators If the malfunction indicator lamp To shift from: Do this:
come on along with the ‘‘D5’’ Press the brake pedal,
indicator, there is a problem in the making sure to keep your
automatic transmission control P to R foot off the accelerator
system. Avoid rapid acceleration and pedal, then move the shift
have the transmission checked by an lever.
Acura dealer as soon as possible. R to N
N to D5
Shifting D5 to D4
Before shifting from park to any D4 to D3
position, press firmly on the brake D3 to 2
pedal making sure to keep your foot 2 to 1
off the accelerator pedal. You cannot 1 to 2 Move the lever.
shift out of Park when the ignition 2 to D3
These indicators on the instrument switch is in the LOCK (0) or D3 to D4
panel show which position the shift ACCESSORY (I) position. D4 to D5
lever is in. D5 to N
N to R
The ‘‘D5’’ indicator comes on for a R to P
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II). If it
flashes while driving (in any shift
position), it indicates a possible
problem in the transmission.

200
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

Park (P) − This position mechani- Reverse (R) − Press the brake Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you
cally locks the transmission. Use pedal, making sure to keep your foot need to restart a stalled engine, or if
Park whenever you are turning off or off the accelerator pedal, then shift it is necessary to stop briefly with
starting the engine. To shift out of from Park to Reverse. To shift from the engine idling. Shift to the Park
Park, you must press on the brake Neutral to Reverse, come to a position if you need to leave your
pedal and have your foot off the complete stop and then shift. vehicle for any reason. Press the
accelerator pedal. brake pedal, making sure to keep
Your vehicle has a reverse lockout so your foot off the accelerator pedal,
If you have done all of the above and you cannot accidentally shift to when you are moving the shift lever
still cannot move the lever out of Reverse from Neutral or any other from Neutral to another gear.
Park, see Shift Lock Release on driving position when the vehicle
page 203 . speed exceeds 7 − 9 mph (12 − 14 Drive (D5) − Use this position for

Driving
km/h). normal driving. The transmission
To avoid transmission damage, come automatically selects a suitable gear
to a complete stop before shifting If you cannot shift to Reverse when for your speed and acceleration. You
into Park. The shift lever must be in the vehicle is stopped, press the may notice the transmission shifting
Park before you can remove the key brake pedal and slowly shift to up at higher speeds when the engine
from the ignition switch. Neutral, and then to Reverse. is cold. This helps the engine warm
up faster.
If there is a problem in the reverse
lockout system, or your vehicle’s
battery is disconnected or goes dead,
you cannot shift to Reverse. (Refer
to Shift Lock Release on page 203 ).

CONTINUED

201
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

Drive (D4, D3) − These positions Second (2) − This position locks First (1) − With the lever in this
are similar to D5, except when you the transmission in second gear. It position, the transmission locks in
select the D4 position, only the first does not downshift to first gear First gear.
four gears are selected. When you when you come to a stop.
select D3, only the first three gears If you shift into First position when
are selected. D4 can also keep the Use Second gear: the vehicle speed is above 31 mph
transmission from cycling between For more power when climbing. (50 km/h), the transmission shifts
fourth and fifth gears in stop-and-go To increase engine braking when into Second gear first to avoid
driving, and D3 can keep the going down steep hills. sudden engine braking.
transmission from cycling between For starting out on a slippery
third and fourth gears. surface or in deep snow. Engine Speed Limiter
To help reduce wheel spin. If you exceed the maximum speed
Use D3 to provide engine braking When driving downhill with a for the gear you are in, the engine
when going down a steep hill. D3 trailer. speed will enter into the tachometer’s
gives you more power and increased red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
engine braking. the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.

202
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Release


Do this if pushing on the brake pedal
does not shift the transmission out of
Park. This procedure is also used to
release the Reverse Lockout.

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Make sure the ignition switch is in


the LOCK (0) position.

To release the Reverse Lockout,

Driving
COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
make sure the ignition switch is in
the ACCESSORY (I) position. 3. Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift To release the reverse lockout,
Lock Release slot cover. Using a move the shift lever from Neutral
key, carefully pry on the edge of to Reverse, then to Park.
the cover to remove it.
6. Remove the key from the Shift
4. Insert the key in the Shift Lock Lock Release slot. Press the brake
Release slot. pedal and restart the engine.

5. Push down on the key and move If you need to use the shift lock
the shift lever out of Park to release, it means your vehicle is
Neutral. developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.

203
Main Menu Table of Contents

VTM-4 System

To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock, do


1. The vehicle must be stopped with one of the following:
the engine running. Press the VTM-4 Lock button.
2. Move the shift lever to First (1), Move the shift lever to D5, D4 or
Second (2), or Reverse (R) gear. D3.
3. Press the VTM-4 Lock button. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
The indicator in the button comes (0).
on.
The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
To get unstuck, apply light pressure disengage when the vehicle speed
to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). It will
the front tires for more than a few automatically engage again as the
seconds. Because of the amount of speed slows below 18 mph (30
The Variable Torque Management torque applied to the rear tires, they km/h). The indicator in the button
4WD System (VTM-4) automatically should not spin. This is normal. If will remain on.
transfers varying amounts of engine you are not able to move the vehicle,
torque to the rear wheels under stop and reverse direction.
lower traction conditions.
Do not continuously spin the f ront tires
If more traction is needed when your of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
vehicle is stuck, or is likely to Do not use the VTM-4 Lock button on the f ront tires can cause transmission
become stuck, you can use the dry, paved roads. Driving on dry, or rear dif f erential damage.
VTM-4 Lock button to increase paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
torque to the rear wheels. damage the rear dif f erential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.

204
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Your vehicle is equipped with a tire Low Tire Pressure Driving on a significantly under-
pressure monitoring system (TPMS) Indicator inflated tire causes the tire to
that turns on every time you start the When the tire pressure monitoring overheat and can lead to tire failure.
engine and monitors the pressure in system warning light is lit, one or Under-inflation also reduces fuel
your tires while driving. more of your tires is significantly efficiency and tire tread life, and may
under-inflated. You should stop and affect the vehicle’s handling and
Each tire has its own pressure check your tires as soon as possible. stopping ability.
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the If you think you can safely drive a Although your tire pressure is
sensor in that tire immediately sends short distance to a service station, monitored, each tire should be
a signal that causes the low tire proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to checked monthly, including the
pressure indicator and the the recommended pressure shown spare.

Driving
appropriate tire on the tire pressure on the driver’s doorjamb.
monitor to come on. Check the pressure with the tires
cold, after the vehicle has been
If the tire is flat, or if the tire parked for at least 2 hours.
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the Set to the recommended inflation
compact spare tire. pressure as specified on the vehicle
placard and in the owner’s manual
(see page 252 ).

205
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Pressure Monitoring Each wheel is equipped with a tire
System (TPMS) Indicator pressure sensor mounted inside the
The appropriate tire indicator and The indicator comes on and stays on tire behind the valve stem. You must
low tire pressure indicator comes on if there is a problem with the tire use TPMS specific wheels. It is
if a tire becomes significantly pressure monitoring system. recommended that you always have
underinflated. Follow the your tires serviced by your dealer or
instructions under ‘‘Low Tire If this happens, the system will shut qualified technician.
Pressure Indicator’’. off and no longer monitor tire After you replace the flat tire, the
pressures. Have the system checked Low Tire Pressure indicator stays on.
by your dealer as soon as possible. This is normal; the system is not
monitoring the spare tire pressure.
Changing a Tire with TPMS Manually check the spare tire
If you have a flat tire, the low tire pressure to be sure it is correct.
pressure and tire monitor indicators
will come on. Replace the indicated Never use a puncture-repairing agent
flat tire with the compact spare tire in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
(see page 261 ). replace the tire pressure sensor.
Have the flat tire repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible.

206
Main Menu Table of Contents

Parking

Always use the parking brake when Parking Tips If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
you park your vehicle. Make sure Make sure the moonroof and the the front wheels away from the
the parking brake is set firmly or windows are closed. curb, and set the parking brake.
your vehicle may roll if it is on an
incline. Turn off the lights. If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
Set the parking brake before you put Place any packages, valuables, etc. curb, and set the parking brake.
the transmission in Park. This keeps in the cargo area, or take them
the vehicle from moving and putting with you. Make sure the parking brake is
pressure on the parking mechanism fully released before driving away.
in the transmission. Lock the doors. Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or

Driving
Never park over dry leaves, tall damage the rear brakes.
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.

207
Main Menu Table of Contents

Braking System

Your vehicle is equipped with disc Check the brakes after driving Brake Wear Indicators
brakes at all four wheels. A power through deep water. Apply the If the brake pads need replacing, you
assist helps reduce the effort needed brakes moderately to see if they feel will hear a distinctive, metallic
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps normal. If not, apply them gently and screeching sound when you apply
you retain steering control when frequently until they do. Be extra the brake pedal. If you do not have
braking very hard. cautious in your driving. the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps Braking System Design the brakes to occasionally squeal or
the brakes applied lightly, builds up The hydraulic system that operates squeak when you apply them.
heat, and reduces their effectiveness. the brakes has two separate circuits.
It also keeps your brake lights on all Each circuit works diagonally across
the time, confusing drivers behind the vehicle (the left-front brake is
you. connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
Constant application of the brakes problem, you will still have braking
when going down a long hill builds at two wheels.
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.

208
Main Menu Table of Contents

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator
helps prevent the brakes from pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain may hear some noise. This is normal: If the ABS indicator comes on, the
steering control by pumping the it is the ABS rapidly pumping the anti-lock function of the braking
brakes rapidly, much faster than a brakes. On dry pavement, you will system has shut down. The brakes
person can do it. need to press on the brake pedal still work like a conventional system,
very hard before the ABS activates. but without anti-lock. You should
The ABS also balances the front-to- However, you may feel the ABS have your dealer inspect your vehicle
rear braking distribution according activate immediately if you are trying as soon as possible.
to vehicle loading. to stop on snow or ice.
If the indicator comes on while
You should never pump the brake pedal. driving, test the brakes as instructed

Driving
Let the ABS work for you by always on page 274 .
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

209
Main Menu Table of Contents

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
system indicator come on together ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
and the parking break is fully distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
released, the front-to-rear braking vehicle. It only helps with steering snow, than a vehicle without anti-
distribution system may also shut control during braking. lock.
down.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of


stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.

210
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

The Vehicle Stability Assist system VSA Activation Indicator VSA System Indicator
helps to stabilize the vehicle during
cornering if the vehicle turns more When VSA activates, you will see the If the VSA system indicator comes
or less than desired. It also assists VSA activation indicator blink. There on while driving, pull to the side of
you in maintaining traction while may also be some unusual noise the road when it is safe, and turn off
accelerating on loose or slippery from the modulator. the engine. Reset the system by
road surfaces. It does this by restarting the engine. If the VSA
regulating the engine’s output, and system indicator stays, or comes
by selectively applying the brakes. back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to

Driving
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. There may also
be some unusual noise from the
modulator.

The VSA system cannot enhance the


vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.

CONTINUED

211
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

If the indicator does not come on VSA Off Switch VSA is turned on every time you
when the ignition switch is turned to start the engine, even if you turned it
ON (II), there may be a problem off the last time you drove the
with the VSA system. Have your vehicle.
dealer inspect your vehicle as soon
as possible. VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
Without VSA, your vehicle will have sizes may cause the VSA to
normal braking and cornering ability, malfunction. When replacing tires,
but it will not have VSA traction and make sure they are of the same size
stability enhancement. and type as your original tires (see
page 255 ).

Deactivate the VSA system if you


This switch is under the left vent. need to drive with the compact spare
Press it to turn the VSA system on tire installed (see page 260 ).
and off.
If you install winter tires, make sure
When VSA is off, the VSA activation they are the same size as those that
indicator comes on as a reminder. were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.

212
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing Weight Limits

Your vehicle has been designed to Load Limit


primarily carry passengers and their
cargo. You can also use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.

Be sure to read the Driving Off-


Highway Guidelines section on page
223 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.

Driving
Tongue Load
Total Trailer Weight The weight that the tongue of a fully
Exceeding any load limit or The maximum weight of the trailer loaded trailer puts on the hitch
improperly loading your vehicle and everything in or on it depends on should be 5 to 10 percent of the total
and trailer can cause a crash in the number of occupants in your trailer weight for boat trailers, and 8
which you can be seriously hurt vehicle and the type of trailer being to 15 percent of total trailer weight
or killed. towed (see page 215 ). for all other trailers. (See page
215 for limits for your towing
Check the loading of your Towing a load that is too heavy can situation). Too much tongue load
vehicle and trailer carefully seriously affect your vehicle’s reduces front-tire traction and
before starting to drive. handling and performance. steering control. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway.

213
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Estimating Loads 3. Connect the fully loaded trailer to
(GVWR) − The maximum The best way to confirm that all the hitch.
allowable weight of the vehicle, all loads are within limits is to check
occupants, all cargo and the tongue them at a public scale. 4. Measure again from the ground to
load is 5,787 lbs (2,630 kg). the same spot on the bottom of the
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale, hitch.
Gross Axle Weight Ratings or if you cannot get to a public scale,
(GAWR) − The maximum we recommend that you estimate 5. Subtract the second measurement
allowable weight on the vehicle axles your total trailer weight and tongue from the first measurement, then
are 2,888 lbs (1,310 kg) on the front load as described next. refer to the following table.
axle, and 2,992 lbs (1,360 kg) on the
rear axle. To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight If the Estimated
Add the weight of your trailer (as difference is: tongue load is:
Gross Combined Weight Rating quoted by the manufacturer) with
(GCWR): everything in or on the trailer. Then 1 ½’’ 150 lbs (68 kg)
The maximum allowable weight of check the tables on page 215 that 2 ¼’’ 250 lbs (114 kg)
the fully loaded vehicle and trailer is you do not exceed the limit for your 3’’ 350 lbs (159 kg)
9,584 lbs (4,470 kg) with the proper conditions. 3 ¾’’ 450 lbs (205 kg)
hitch and fluid coolers. (See page
217 for information about fluid To Estimate the Tongue Load If the difference is more than 3 ¾’’
coolers.) 1. Park the vehicle on level ground. inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
The GCWR must be reduced 2 2. Measure and record the distance remove cargo as needed.
percent for every 1,000 feet (305 from the ground to the bottom of
meters) of elevation. the trailer hitch.

214
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing Weight Limits

Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:


BOAT TRAILERS
Number of Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Occupants* Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load
2 4500 lbs (2045 kg) 450 lbs (205 kg)
3 4500 lbs (2045 kg) 410 lbs (185 kg)
4 4500 lbs (2045 kg) 310 lbs (140 kg)
5 4000 lbs (1820 kg) 215 lbs (100 kg)
6 1700 lbs (770 kg) 90 lbs (40 kg)
7 Towing is Not Recommended

Driving
OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS
Number of Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Occupants* Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load
2 3500 lbs (1590 kg) 450 lbs (205 kg)
3 3500 lbs (1590 kg) 410 lbs (185 kg)
4 3000 lbs (1365 kg) 310 lbs (140 kg)
5 2000 lbs (910 kg) 215 lbs (100 kg)
6 1000 lbs (455 kg) 90 lbs (40 kg)
7 Towing is Not Recommended


The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7
kg) of luggage in the cargo area.

215
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Checking Loads
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.

2. Check the gross vehicle weight. 4. Remember, maximum gross


Limit: 5,798 lbs (2,630 kg) combined weight should be
decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
3. If you cannot weight on the rear (305 meters) of elevation.
axle directly, you can calculate the
rear gross axle weight by
subtracting the weight in Step 1
1. Check the front gross axle weight. from the weight in Step 2.
Limit: 2882 lbs (1307 kg)

5. Check the weight of the hitched


trailer. Write this number down.

216
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Towing Equipment and Hitch


Accessories We strongly recommend that you
Towing generally requires a variety have your dealer install an Acura
of supplemental equipment. To hitch and use the required fluid
ensure the best quality, we coolers. Using non-Acura equipment
recommend that you purchase Acura may result in serious damage to your
equipment whenever possible. vehicle.

Your dealer offers a trailer package Transmission Fluid Cooler and


6. Check the weight of the unhitched that includes a hitch, a ball mount, a Power Steering Fluid Cooler
trailer. Limit: See page 215 . wiring harness, a heavy-duty To help prevent overheating, a
transmission fluid cooler. heavy-duty transmission fluid cooler

Driving
7. Calculate the tongue load. and a heavy-duty power steering
Subtract the weight in Step 5 from Discuss any additional needs with fluid cooler are required for trailer
the your trailer sales or rental agency, towing. These coolers are available
weight in step 6. and make sure all equipment is only from your dealer.
Limit: See page 215 . properly installed, maintained, and
Range: 5-10% for boat trailers also meets state, federal, province, Weight Distributing Hitch
8-15% for other trailers and local regulations. A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.

CONTINUED

217
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Brakes Safety Chains Spare Tires


Acura requires that any trailer with a Always use safety chains when you When towing a trailer, we
total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455 tow a trailer. Make sure the chains recommend that you carry a full-size
kg) or more have its own brakes. are secured to the trailer and hitch, spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and that they cross under the tongue and trailer. See page 255 for proper
There are two common types of and can catch the trailer if it tire size, page 267 for how to store a
trailer brakes: surge and electric. becomes unhitched. Leave enough full size wheel and tire, and page
Surge brakes are common for boat slack to allow the trailer to turn 263 for information on changing a
trailers, since the brakes will get wet. corners easily, but do not let the flat tire.
chains drag on the ground.
If you choose electric brakes, be Remember to unhitch the trailer
sure they are electrically actuated. Sway Control before changing a flat. Ask your
Do not attempt to tap into your This device is recommended if your trailer sales or rental agency where
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No trailer tends to sway. Your trailer and how to store the trailer’s spare
matter how successful it may seem, maker can tell you what kind of sway tire.
any attempt to attach trailer brakes control you need and how to install it.
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and Trailer Mirrors
create a potential hazard. Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
See your brake manufacturer for a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
more information on installing should install special mirrors if you
electric brakes. cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.

218
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Trailer Lights We recommend that you have your Pre-Tow Checklist


dealer install a Acura wiring harness When preparing to tow, and before
GROUND BACK-UP LEFT TURN and converter. This harness has driving away, be sure to check the
(BLACK) LIGHT SIGNAL been designed for your vehicle. following:
(GREEN/ (GREEN/
BLACK) BLUE)
If you use a non-Acura trailer The vehicle has been properly
lighting harness and converter, you serviced, and the tires, brakes,
can get the mating connector and suspension, cooling system, and
pins that mate with the connector in lights are in good operating
your vehicle from your dealer. condition. If you tow frequently,
RIGHT TURN BRAKE follow the Severe Conditions
SIGNAL LIGHT TAILLIGHT
Since lighting and wiring vary with maintenance schedule.

Driving
(GREEN/ (WHITE/ (RED/
YELLOW) BLACK) BLACK) trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install The trailer has been properly
Trailer lights and equipment must a suitable connector between the serviced and is in good condition.
comply with federal, state, province, vehicle and the trailer.
and local regulations. Check trailer All weights and loads are within
light requirements for the areas limits.
where you plan to tow, and use only
equipment designed for your vehicle. The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
To get to your vehicle’s trailer
lighting connector, open the tailgate, All items on and in the trailer are
remove the cargo cover, then properly secured and cannot shift
remove the rear panel trim. The while you drive.
connector is on the left side. CONTINUED

219
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Your vehicle tires and spare are in Driving Safely With a Trailer To prevent the transmission from
good condition and properly The added weight, length, and shifting frequently, drive in the D4
inflated. height of a trailer will affect your position.
vehicle’s handling and performance,
The trailer tires and spare are in so driving with a trailer requires Making Turns and Braking
good condition and inflated as some special driving skills and Make turns more slowly and wider
recommended by the trailer techniques. than normal. The trailer tracks a
maker. smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
For your safety and the safety of can hit or run over something the
others, take time to practice driving vehicle misses. Allow more time and
maneuvers before heading for the distance for braking. Do not brake or
open road, and follow the guidelines turn suddenly as this could cause the
below. trailer to jackknife or turn over.

Break-In Period
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 500miles (800
kilometers) (see page 186 ).

Towing Speeds and Gears


Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
When towing a fixed-sided trailer (88
km/h). At higher speeds, the trailer
may sway or affect vehicle handling.

220
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing a Trailer

Driving on Hills Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting Retrieving a Boat


When climbing hills, closely watch Crosswinds and air turbulence If the vehicle’s tires slip when
your temperature gauge. If it nears caused by passing trucks can disrupt retrieving a boat from the water,
the red (hot) mark, turn the air your steering and cause trailer shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if swaying. When being passed by a Lock (see page 204 ). Disengage
necessary, pull to the side of the large vehicle, keep a constant speed, VTM-4 Lock as soon as the boat is
road to let the engine cool. and steer straight ahead. Do not try out of the water to prevent damage
to make quick steering or braking to the VTM-4 system.
If the transmission shifts frequently corrections.
while going up a hill, shift to D3.
Backing Up
If you must stop when facing uphill, Always drive slowly and have

Driving
use the foot brake or parking brake. someone guide you when backing up.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in Grip the bottom of the steering
place by pressing on the accelerator, wheel, then turn the wheel to the left
this could cause the automatic to get the trailer to move to the left.
transmission to overheat. Turn the wheel to the right to move
the trailer to the right.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to D3. Do Parking
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes. Remember, it Follow all normal precautions when
takes longer to slow down and parking, including putting the
stop when towing a trailer. transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.

221
Main Menu Table of Contents

Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome

Your MDX can be towed behind a Press on the brake pedal. Shift the Extended Towing
motorhome at legal highway speeds lever through all the positions (P, If you tow more than 8 hours in one
up to 65 mph (100 km/h). Do not R, N, D5, D4, D3, 2, 1). day, you should repeat the above
exceed 65 mph (100 km/h) or severe procedure at least every 8 hours
transmission damage will occur. To Shift to D5, then to N. Let the (when you stop for fuel, etc.)
avoid damage to the 4WD system, it engine run for three minutes, then
must be towed with all four wheels turn it off.
on the ground (flat towing).
Release the parking brake. The steering system can be damaged if
When purchasing a tow bar, make the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
sure you select a reputable Leave the ignition switch in the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
manufacturer. Follow the ACCESSORY (I) position so the position, and make sure the steering
manufacturer’s attachment steering wheel does not lock. wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
instructions carefully. Make sure the radio and any items towing.
plugged into the accessory power
Perform this procedure every day sockets are turned off so you do
immediately before you begin towing. not run down the battery.
Otherwise, severe automatic
transmission damage will occur.

Check the transmission fluid level


(see page 242 ).

Start the engine.

222
Main Menu Table of Contents

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Your vehicle has been designed Important Safety Precautions


primarily for use on pavement. But To avoid loss of control or rollover,
its higher ground clearance and four- Improperly operating this be sure to follow all precautions and
wheel drive VTM-4 system allow you vehicle on or off-pavement can recommendations.
to occasionally travel on unpaved cause an accident or rollover in
roads, to campgrounds, picnic sites, which you and your passengers Be sure to store cargo properly
and similar locations. It is not could be seriously injured or and do not exceed your cargo load
designed for trailblazing, mountain killed. limits (see page 194 and 213 ).
climbing, or other challenging off-
road activities. Follow all instructions and Whenever you drive, make sure
guidelines in the owner’s you and your passengers always
If you decide to drive on unpaved manual. wear seat belts.

Driving
roads, you will find that it requires Keep your speed low and
somewhat different driving skills. don’t drive faster than Keep your speed low, and never
Your vehicle will also handle conditions permit. go faster than the conditions allow.
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra It’s up to you to continually assess
attention to the precautions and tips the situation and drive within the
in this section, and get acquainted limits.
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.

223
Main Menu Table of Contents

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

Check Out Your Vehicle Accelerating and Braking vehicle to tip or roll over.
Before you leave the pavement, be For better traction on all surfaces,
sure to do all scheduled maintenance accelerate slowly and gradually build Driving on Slopes
and service and that you inspect your up speed. If you try to start too fast If you can’t clearly see all road
vehicle. Pay special attention to the on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you conditions or obstacles, walk the
condition of the tires and check the might not have enough traction to slope before you drive on it. If you
tire pressure. get underway and you may dig have any doubt whether or not you
yourself a hole. Starting with the can safely drive on the slope, don’t
After you return to the pavement, shift lever in second gear (2) will do it. Find another route.
carefully inspect your vehicle to help you have a smoother start on
make sure there is no damage that snow and ice. If you are driving up a hill and find
could make driving it unsafe. that you cannot continue, do not try to
Recheck the condition of the tires Keep in mind that you will usually turn around. Your vehicle could roll
and the tire pressure. need more time and distance to over. Slowly back down the hill,
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces. following the same route you took up
Remember: Avoid hard braking. Do not pump the hill.
The route presents limits (too steep the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
or bumpy roads). You have limits system pump them for you. Crossing a Stream
(driving skill and comfort). And your Before driving through water, stop
vehicle has limits (traction, stability, Avoiding Obstacles and make sure that:
and power). Debris in the road can damage your The water is not deep enough to
suspension or other components. cover your wheel hubs, axles or
Driving off-highway can be Because your vehicle has a high exhaust pipe. You could stall and
hazardous if you fail to recognize center of gravity, driving over a large not be able to restart your engine.
limits and take the proper obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop The water can also damage
precautions. into a deep hole can cause your important vehicle components.

224
Main Menu Table of Contents

Off-Highway Driving Guidelines

The banks are sloped so you can If the water is deeper than the wheel needs good traction to avoid
drive out. hubs, some additional service may becoming stuck, too.
The water is not flowing too fast. be required. This service is not
Deep rushing water can sweep you covered by your warranties. You should never use a jack to try to
downstream. Even very shallow get unstuck. Your vehicle could
rushing water can wash the If You Get Stuck easily slip off the jack and hurt you
ground from under your tires and If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4 or someone else.
cause you to lose traction and Lock (see page 204 ). Carefully try to
possibly roll over. go in the direction (forward or Towing a Trailer Off-Road
The banks and surface under the reverse) that you think will get you You may be able to safely tow a
water provide good traction. The unstuck. Do not spin the tires at high lightweight trailer (such as a
water may hide hazards such as speeds. It will not help you get out motorcycle or small tent trailer) off-

Driving
rocks, holes, or mud. and may cause damage to the road if you follow these guidelines.
transmission or VTM-4 system. Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
If you decide it is safe to drive or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
through water, choose a suitable If you are unable to free yourself, kg).
speed and engage the VTM-4 Lock. your vehicle is equipped with front Try to stay on smooth, level dirt
Proceed without shifting or changing and rear tow hooks designed for this roads, and avoid driving in hilly
speeds, and do not stop the vehicle purpose. terrain.
or shut off the engine. Allow extra room for starting,
Use a nylon strap to attach the MDX stopping, and turning.
After driving through water, test to the recovery vehicle and carefully Slow down if you encounter bumps
your brakes. If they got wet, gently take out the slack in the strap. Once or other obstacles.
pump them while driving slowly until the strap is tight, the recovery
they operate normally. vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle

225
Main Menu

226
Main Menu

Maintenance

This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 228


important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Schedule .................. 229
maintained and how to follow basic Maintenance Record ..................... 233
maintenance safety precautions. Fluid Locations............................... 236
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 237
This section also includes Changing the Oil and Filter .......... 238
Maintenance Schedules for normal Engine Coolant ............................... 240
driving and severe driving conditions, Windshield Washers ..................... 241
a Maintenance Record, and instruc- Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 242
tions for simple maintenance tasks Brake Fluid ..................................... 243
you may want to take care of Power Steering Fluid..................... 244
yourself. Timing Belt ..................................... 244
Lights .............................................. 245
If you have the skills and tools to per- Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 249

Maintenance
form more complex maintenance Floor Mats ...................................... 249
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Wiper Blades .................................. 250
to purchase the Service Manual. See Tires ................................................ 252
page 299 for information on how to Checking the Battery .................... 257
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Vehicle Storage .............................. 258

227
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Safety

All service items not detailed in this Wear eye protection and before touching any parts.
section should be performed by a protective clothing when working
certified technician or other qualified with the battery or compressed air. Injury from moving parts. Do
mechanic. not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Important Safety Precautions
To eliminate potential hazards, read Improperly maintaining this
the instructions before you begin, vehicle or failing to correct a
and make sure you have the tools problem before driving can Failure to properly follow
and skills required. cause a crash in which you can maintenance instructions and
be seriously hurt or killed. precautions can cause you to
Make sure your vehicle is parked be seriously hurt or killed.
on level ground, the parking brake Always follow the inspection
is set, and the engine is off. and maintenance Always follow the procedures
recommendations in this owner’s and precautions in this owner’s
To clean parts, use a commercially manual. manual.
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
Potential Vehicle Hazards Some of the most important safety
To reduce the possibility of fire or Carbon Monoxide poison from precautions are given here. However,
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, engine exhaust. Be sure there is we cannot warn you of every
and flames away from the battery adequate ventilation whenever you conceivable hazard that can arise in
and all fuel-related parts. operate the engine. performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
Burns from hot parts. Let the should perform a given task.
engine and exhaust system cool

228
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Schedule

The maintenance schedule assumes Used primarily as a delivery conditions.


you will use your vehicle as normal vehicle or taxi that is driven
transportation for passengers and mostly in stop-and-go traffic and/ Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-
their possessions. You should also or parked with the engine idling. iced roads.
follow these recommendations:
Which Schedule to Follow NOTE: If you only OCCASIONALLY
Avoid exceeding your vehicle’s Service your vehicle according to the drive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, you
load limit. This puts excess stress time and mileage periods on one of should follow the Maintenance
on the engine, brakes, and many the Maintenance Schedules on the Schedule for Normal Conditions.
other vehicle parts. The load limit following pages.
is shown on the tire information U.S. Owners − Follow the Canadian Owners − Follow the
label on the driver’s doorjamb. Maintenance Schedule for Severe Maintenance Schedule for Severe
Conditions if you drive your vehicle Conditions.
Operate your vehicle on MAINLY under one or more of the

Maintenance
reasonable roads within the legal following conditions.
speed limit.
Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)
Drive your vehicle regularly over a per trip or, in freezing
distance of several miles temperatures, driving less than 10
(kilometers). miles (16 km) per trip.

Always use unleaded gasoline with Driving in extremely hot [over


the proper octane rating (see page 90°F (32°C)] conditions.
186 ).
Trailer towing, driving with a roof
rack, or driving in mountainous

229
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Schedule

Servicing Your Vehicle U.S. Vehicles: Maintenance, Engine oil level − Check every
Your authorized Acura dealer knows replacement, or repair of time you fill the fuel tank. See
your vehicle best and can provide emissions control devices and page 189 .
competent, efficient service. systems may be done by any
However, service at a dealer is not automotive repair establishment Engine coolant level − Check the
mandatory to keep your warranties or individual using parts that are radiator reserve tank every time
in effect. Maintenance may be done ‘‘certified’’ to EPA standards. you fill the fuel tank. See page 190 .
by any qualified service facility or
skilled person to keep your According to state and federal Automatic transmission − Check
warranties in effect. Keep all the regulations, failure to perform the fluid level monthly. See page
receipts as proof of completion, and maintenance on the items marked 242 .
have the person who does the work with # will not void your emissions
fill out the Maintenance Record. warranties. However, all Brakes − Check the fluid level
Check your warranty booklet for maintenance services should be monthly. See page 243 .
more information. performed at the recommended time
or mileage period to ensure long- Tires − Check the tire pressure
We recommend the use of Acura term reliability. monthly. Examine the tread for
parts and fluids whenever you have wear and foreign objects. See page
maintenance done. Owner’s Maintenance Checks 253 .
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If Lights − Check the operation of
you are unsure of how to perform the headlights, parking lights,
any check, turn to the appropriate taillights, high-mount brake light,
page listed. turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate light monthly. See
page 245 .

230
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
miles x 1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150
km x 1,000 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240
Check engine oil and coolant Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check tires Check inflation and condition once a month
Replace engine oil Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 223 ) Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Replace engine oil filter

Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions


Check front and rear brake wear
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect the following items:
Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots (Or every 1 year, whichever comes first)
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Inspect drive belts
Replace dust and pollen filter (Or every 2 years, whichever comes first)
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance
(Otherwise adjust only if noisy)
Replace automatic transmission fluid*1
Replace transfer fluid*1
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid*2
Inspect idle speed
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
(Or every 7 years, whichever comes first)
Replace engine coolant At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

*1: At 45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
*2: At every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) up to 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 1 year, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page 230 .

231
Main Menu Table of Contents

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).
miles x 1,000 7.5 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150
km x 1,000 12 24 48 72 96 120 144 168 192 216 240
Check engine oil and coolant Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Check tires Check inflation and condition once a month
Replace engine oil and oil filter Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 254 ) Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
Check front and rear brake wear
Inspect the following items: Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots


Suspension components, Driveshaft boots
Check parking brake adjustment
Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches
Inspect the following items:
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids (Or every 1 year, whichever comes first)
Exhaust system#
Fuel lines and connections#
Lights and controls/vehicle underbody
Inspect drive belts
Replace dust and pollen filter
Replace automatic transmission fluid (Or every 2 years, whichever comes first)
Replace transfer fluid
Replace air cleaner element Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)
Inspect valve clearance
(Otherwise adjust only if noisy)
Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid*1, *2
Inspect idle speed
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt#, *3, and inspect water pump
(Or every 7 years, whichever comes first)
Replace engine coolant At 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years
Replace brake fluid Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
*1 : At every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) up to 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or every 6 months, then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 1 year.
*2 : Follow this schedule for rear differential fluid replacement if you use your vehicle for off-highway driving, trailer towing, mainly in stop-and-go driving. Otherwise, use
the fluid replacement schedule in the Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions.
*3 : See timing belt on page 244 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, middle column, page 230 .
232
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page 231 ) or severe
conditions (page 232 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

3,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km 33,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
6,000 km 54,000 km
Date Date

7,500 mi mi/km 37,500 mi mi/km


12,000 km 60,000 km
Date Date

11,250 mi mi/km 41,250 mi mi/km


18,000 km 66,000 km
Date Date

15,000 mi mi/km 45,000 mi mi/km


24,000 km 72,000 km
Date Date

Maintenance
18,750 mi mi/km 48,750 mi mi/km
30,000 km 78,000 km
Date Date

22,500 mi mi/km 52,500 mi mi/km


36,000 km 84,000 km
Date Date

26,250 mi mi/km 56,250 mi mi/km


42,000 km 90,000 km
Date Date

30,000 mi mi/km 60,000 mi mi/km


48,000 km 96,000 km
Date Date

CONTINUED
233
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

63,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km 93,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km
102,000 km 150,000 km
Date Date

67,500 mi mi/km 97,500 mi mi/km


108,000 km 156,000 km
Date Date

71,250 mi mi/km 101,250 mi mi/km


114,000 km 162,000 km
Date Date

75,000 mi mi/km 105,000 mi mi/km


120,000 km 168,000 km
Date Date

78,750 mi mi/km 108,750 mi mi/km


126,000 km 174,000 km
Date Date

82,500 mi mi/km 112,500 mi mi/km


132,000 km 180,000 km
Date Date

86,250 mi mi/km 116,250 mi mi/km


138,000 km 186,000 km
Date Date

90,000 mi mi/km 120,000 mi mi/km


144,000 km 192,000 km
Date Date

234
Main Menu Table of Contents

Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

123,750 mi Signature or dealer stamp mi/km


198,000 km
Date

127,500 mi mi/km
204,000 km
Date

131,250 mi mi/km
210,000 km
Date

135,000 mi mi/km
216,000 km
Date

138,750 mi mi/km
222,000 km

Maintenance
Date

142,500 mi mi/km
228,000 km
Date

146,250 mi mi/km
234,000 km
Date

150,000 mi mi/km
240,000 km
Date

235
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fluid Locations

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID


(Orange loop) (Gray cap)

WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)

COOLANT
RESERVOIR

AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
POWER STEERING (Yellow loop)
FLUID (Red cap) RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

236
Main Menu Table of Contents

Adding Engine Oil

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
Oil is a major contributor to your 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
engine’s performance and longevity. highly recommended that you use
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
detergent oil displaying the API optimum engine protection. Make
Certification Seal. This seal indicates sure the API Certification Seal says
the oil is energy conserving, and that ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
Unscrew and remove the engine oil fuel economy.

Maintenance
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Install the engine oil
fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait API CERTIFICATION SEAL
a few minutes and recheck the oil
level (see page 189 ). Do not fill
above the upper mark; you could
damage the engine.
Ambient Temperature

237
Main Menu Table of Contents

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

Synthetic Oil Changing the Oil and Filter


You may use a synthetic motor oil if Always change the oil and filter
it meets the same requirements according to the recommendations in
given for a conventional motor oil, it the maintenance schedule. The oil
displays the API Certification Seal and filter collect contaminants that
and it is the proper weight. You must can damage your engine if they are
follow the oil and filter change not removed regularly.
intervals given in the maintenance
schedule. Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
Engine Oil Additives underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
Your vehicle does not require any oil should be raised on a service station- WASHER DRAIN BOLT
additives. Additives may adversely type hydraulic lift for this service.
affect your engine’s or transmission’s Unless you have the knowledge and 2. Open the hood and remove the
performance and durability. proper equipment, you should have engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
this maintenance done by a skilled drain bolt and washer from the
mechanic. bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.

238
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing the Oil and Filter

OIL FILTER 6. Refill the engine with the recom-


mended oil.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
Engine oil change capacity harmf ul to the environment. If you
(including filter): change your own oil, please dispose of
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap. center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
Start the engine. The oil pressure or dump it on the ground.
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine and check your work.

3. Remove the oil filter, and let the 8. Let the engine run for several

Maintenance
remaining oil drain. A special minutes, then check the drain bolt
wrench (available from your and oil filter for leaks.
dealer) is required.
9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
4. Install a new oil filter according to for several minutes, then check
the instructions that come with it. the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

239
Main Menu Table of Contents

Engine Coolant

Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda All Season If the reserve tank is completely
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This empty, you should also check the
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
Removing the radiator cap
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not while the engine is hot can
available, you may use another cause the coolant to spray out,
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a seriously scalding you.
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant Always let the engine and
RESERVE TANK recommended for aluminum engines. radiator cool down before
Continued use of any non-Honda removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant can result in corrosion,
tank is at or below the MIN line, add causing the cooling system to
coolant to bring it up to between the malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
MIN and MAX lines. Inspect the system flushed and refilled with
cooling system for leaks. Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.

240
Main Menu Table of Contents

Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers

3. The coolant level should be up to Windshield Washers


the base of the filler neck. Add Check the fluid level in the
coolant if it is low. windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Pour the coolant slowly and The low washer level indicator will
carefully so you do not spill. Clean come on when the level is low (see
up any spill immediately; it could page 63 ).
damage components in the engine Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
compartment. windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
4. Put the radiator cap back on, and prevents freezing in cold weather.
tighten it fully. When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank. blades with windshield washer fluid

Maintenance
1. Make sure the engine and radiator Fill it to halfway between the MAX on a clean cloth. This will help to
are cool. and MIN marks. Put the cap back condition them.
on the reserve tank.
When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the Do not add any rust inhibitors or Do not use engine antif reeze or a
cooling system by turning the other additives to your vehicle’s vinegar/water solution in the
radiator cap counterclockwise, cooling system. They may not be windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
without pressing down. compatible with the coolant or can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
engine components. a vinegar/water solution can damage
2. Remove the radiator cap by the windshield washer pump. Use only
pushing down and turning commercially-available windshield
counterclockwise. washer f luid.

241
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission Fluid

DIPSTICK Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so


you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,


the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
UPPER MARK Transmission Fluid), then drive the
LOWER MARK
vehicle for a short distance. Do this
DIPSTICK three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
Check the fluid level with the engine 4. Remove the dipstick and check
at normal operating temperature. the fluid level. It should be
1. Park the vehicle on level ground. between the upper and lower
Shut off the engine. marks.

2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) 5. If the level is below the lower
from the transmission, and wipe it mark, remove the fill plug and add
with a clean cloth. fluid into the tube to bring it to the
upper mark.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission.

242
Main Menu Table of Contents

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid

6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Brake Fluid


in the transmission. Check the fluid level in the brake MAX
fluid reservoir monthly. Replace it
The transmission should be drained according to the maintenance
and refilled with new fluid according schedule recommendations.
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule. Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
If you are not sure how to add fluid, available, you should use only DOT 3
contact your dealer. or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. MIN
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life The fluid level should be between

Maintenance
of the system. Have the brake the MIN and MAX marks on the side
system flushed and refilled with of the reservoir. If the level is at or
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid below the MIN mark, your brake
DOT 3 as soon as possible. system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not worn brake pads.
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.

243
Main Menu Table of Contents

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

Power Steering Fluid Always use Honda Power Steering Timing Belt
Fluid. You may use another power The timing belt should be replaced
UPPER LEVEL steering fluid as an emergency at the intervals shown in the
replacement, but have the power maintenance schedule.
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible. Replace the belt at 60,000 miles
(100,000 km) if you regularly drive
A low power steering fluid level can your vehicle in one or more of these
indicate a leak in the system. Check conditions:
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as In very high temperatures
LOWER
possible. (over 110°F, 43°C).
LEVEL In very low temperatures
(under −20°F, −29°C).
Check the level on the side of the Frequently tow a trailer.
reservoir when the engine is cold. Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
The fluid should be between the or right lock and holding it there can
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL. damage the power steering pump.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so


you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.

244
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb


The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has halogen headlight
when your vehicle was new. If you bulbs, two on each side. When
regularly carry heavy items in the replacing a bulb, handle it by its base
cargo area or pull a trailer, and protect the glass from contact
readjustment may be required. with your skin or hard objects. If you
Adjustment should be done by your touch the glass, clean it with
dealer or other qualified mechanic. denatured alcohol and a clean cloth.

Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot BULB CONNECTOR


when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to 2. Remove the electrical connector

Maintenance
overheat and shatter. from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
1. Open the hood. slide the connector off the bulb.

3. Remove the bulb by turning it


approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.

CONTINUED

245
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

Replacing Front Turn Signal/


Parking and Side Marker Light
Bulbs

TAB

4. Insert the new bulb into the hole


and turn it one-quarter turn clock-
wise to lock it in place.
1. Remove the socket from the 3. Install the new bulb into the
5. Push the electrical connector onto headlight assembly by turning it socket.
the new bulb. one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Insert the socket back into the
6. Turn on the headlights to test the 2. To remove a bulb, pull it straight headlight assembly. Turn it
new bulb. out of its socket. clockwise to lock it in place.

5. Test the lights to make sure the


new bulb is working.

246
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs 6. Install the new bulb into the


socket.

7. Push the socket into the light


assembly and turn it clockwise
until it locks.

8. Test the lights to make sure the


new bulb is working.

9. Install the rear light assembly in


the body. Tighten the two screws.
Snap the covers back into position.

Maintenance
1. Open the tailgate. Use a 4. Remove the socket by turning it
screwdriver protected with a cloth one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
to pry open the two covers.
5. Remove the burned-out bulb by
2. Remove the two screws and pulling it straight out of the socket.
remove the rear light assembly
from the rear pillar.

3. Determine which of the four bulbs


is burned out: brake/taillight, turn
signal/hazard lights, side marker
light, or back-up light.

247
Main Menu Table of Contents

Lights

Replacing a High-mount Brake 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its


Light Bulb socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.

4. Test the lights to make sure the


new bulb is working.

5. Put the socket back into the light


assembly, and turn it clockwise to
lock it in place.

6. Place the cover back into the light


assembly. Push it up until it locks
in place.

1. Remove the light assembly cover


by prying carefully with a cloth-
covered screwdriver in the
notches along the top edge. Then
pivot the cover out and down.

2. Remove the socket from the light


assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.

248
Main Menu Table of Contents

Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats

Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats If you use an aftermarket floor mat,
make sure it fits properly and that it
LOOP can be used with the floor mat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.

Maintenance
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft The driver’s floor mat that came
brush with a mixture of mild soap with your vehicle hooks over the
and warm water to clean them. Do floor mat anchor. This keeps the
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning floor mat from sliding forward and
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before possibly interfering with the pedals.
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat If you remove these floor mats,
belt anchors can cause the belts to make sure to re-anchor them when
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of you put them back in your vehicle.
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.

249
Main Menu Table of Contents

Wiper Blades

Check the condition of the wiper WIPER ARMS


blades at least every six months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, and areas
that are getting hard, or if they leave
streaks and unwiped areas when
used.

LOCK TAB

To replace a wiper blade: 2. Front only:


Disconnect the blade assembly
1. Raise the wiper arm off the from the wiper arm by pushing in
windshield. the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
Windshield: Raise the driver’s side while you push the blade assembly
first, then the passenger’s side. toward the base of the arm.

250
Main Menu Table of Contents

Wiper Blades

BLADE BLADE 5. Slide the new wiper blade into the


holder until the tabs lock.

6. Front only:
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.

7. Lower the wiper arm down against


the window.
Windshield: Lower the passenger’s
REINFORCEMENT side first, then the driver’s side.

3. Remove the blade from its holder 4. Examine the new wiper blades. If

Maintenance
by grasping the tabbed end of the they have no plastic or metal
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs reinforcement along the back
come out of the holder. edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.

251
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated for Normal Driving
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of P235/65R17 103T 32 psi (220 kPa ,
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding 2.2 kgf/cm )
comfort.
The following pages give more The compact spare tire pressure is:
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly, 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to For convenience, the recommended
fail from being overheated. tire sizes and cold air pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
Overinflated tires can make your
Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride more harshly, are Tire pressure for high speed driving
worn or improperly inflated can more prone to damage from road is the same as for normal driving.
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly.
be seriously hurt or killed. For additional technical information
The tire pressure monitoring system about your tires, see page 288 .
Follow all instructions in this (TPMS) will warn you when a tire
owner’s manual regarding tire pressure is low. See page 205 for Use a gauge to measure the air
inflation and maintenance. information on the TPMS. pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
We recommend that you visually lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
check your tires every day. If you to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
think a tire might be low, check it Remember to check the spare tire at
immediately with a tire gauge. the same time.

252
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

Check the pressure in the tires when Tubeless tires have some ability to Tire Inspection
they are cold. This means the vehicle self-seal if they are punctured. You Every time you check inflation, you
has been parked for at least three should look closely for punctures if a should also examine the tires for
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 tire starts losing pressure. damage, foreign objects, and wear.
km).
You should get your own tire You should look for:
If you check the pressure when the pressure gauge and use it whenever Bumps or bulges in the tread or
tires are hot [driven for several miles you check your tire pressures. This side of the tire. Replace the tire if
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4 will make it easier for you to tell if a you find either of these conditions.
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 pressure loss is due to a tire problem
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold and not due to a variation between Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
reading. This is normal; do not gauges. of the tire. Replace the tire if you
release air to match the cold can see fabric or cord.
pressure.

Maintenance
Excessive tread wear.

253
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation


In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires if


you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS wheel. When you have new tires (For Non-directional (For Directional
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
Your vehicle’s tires have wear balanced. This increases riding
indicators molded into the tread. comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and
When the tread wears down to that have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate
point, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 balance. the tires every 7,500 miles (12,000
mm) wide band running across the km). Move the tires to the positions
tread. This shows there is less than shown in the chart each time they
1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left on are rotated. If you purchase
the tire. A tire that is this worn gives Improper wheel weights can damage directional tires, rotate only front-to-
very little traction on wet roads. You your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use back.
should replace the tire if you can see only Acura wheel weights f or balancing.
the tread wear indicator in three or
more places around the tire.

254
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

Replacing Tires and Wheels It is best to replace all four tires at


Replace your tires with radial tires of the same time. If that is not possible
the same size, load range, speed or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your
rating, and maximum cold tire tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and
pressure rating (as shown on the Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash
tire’s sidewall). affect your vehicle’s handling. in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on If you ever replace a wheel, make
your vehicle can reduce braking sure that the wheel’s specifications Always use the size and type of
ability, traction, and steering match those of the original wheels. tires recommended in this
accuracy. Using tires of a different owner’s manual.
size or construction can cause the Also be sure you use only TPMS
ABS and vehicle stability assist specific wheels. If you do not, your
system (VSA) to work inconsistently. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Wheel and Tire Specifications

Maintenance
will not work on that tire. Wheel:
17 x 6 1/2 JJ
Replacement wheels are available at
your Acura dealer. Tires:
P235/65R17 103T

See page 286 for DOT tire quality


grading information, and page
288 for tire size explanation.

255
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tires

Winter Driving Tire Chains


Tires marked ‘‘M + S’’ or ‘‘All Because your vehicle has limited tire
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’ Traction devices that are the wrong
weather tread design suitable for cable-type traction devices, with size or improperly installed can
most winter driving conditions. rubber chain tensioners on the front damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
tires. Do not use any chains on rear suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
For the best performance in snowy wheels. Use traction devices only driving if they are hitting any part of
or icy conditions, you should install when required by driving conditions the vehicle.
snow tires or tire chains. They may or local laws. Make sure they are the
be required by local laws under correct size for your tires. Metal link-
certain conditions. type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.

Snow Tires When installing cables, follow the


If you mount snow tires on your manufacturer’s instructions, and
vehicle, make sure they are radial mount them as tight as you can.
tires of the same size and load range Make sure they are not contacting
as original tires. Mount snow tires on the brake lines or suspension. Drive
all four wheels. The traction slowly with them installed. If you
provided by snow tires on dry roads hear them coming into contact with
may be lower than your original tires. the body or chassis, stop and
Check with the tire dealer for investigate. Remove them as soon as
maximum speed recommendations. you begin driving on cleared roads.

256
Main Menu Table of Contents

Checking the Battery

Check the terminals for corrosion (a If you need to connect the battery to
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
white or yellowish powder). To a charger, disconnect both cables to
remove it, cover the terminals with a prevent damaging your vehicle’s
solution of baking soda and water. It electrical system. Always disconnect
will bubble up and turn brown. When the negative (−) cable first, and
this stops, wash it off with plain reconnect it last.
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion. The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
If additional battery maintenance is operation.
needed, see your dealer or a
Check the condition of the battery qualified technician. A spark or flame can cause the

Maintenance
monthly by looking at the test battery to explode with enough
indicator window. The label on the WARNING: Battery posts, force to kill or seriously hurt you.
battery explains the test indicator’s terminals, and related accessories
colors. contain lead and lead compounds. Wear protective clothing and a
Wash your hands after handling. face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.

257
Main Menu Table of Contents

Vehicle Storage

If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than one ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground. which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, periodically run the
the vehicle is being stored engine until it reaches full
Fill the fuel tank. indoors). operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
Change the engine oil and filter. Disconnect the battery. twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Wash and dry the exterior Support the front and rear wiper
completely. blade arms with a folded towel or If you store your vehicle for 12
rag so they do not touch the months or longer, have your dealer
Clean the interior. Make sure the windshield. perform the inspections called for in
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are the 24 months/30,000 miles
completely dry. To minimize sticking, apply a (48,000 km) maintenance schedule
silicone spray lubricant to all door (Normal Conditions) as soon as you
Leave the parking brake off. Put and tailgate seals. Also, apply a take it out of storage (see page 231 ).
the transmission in Park. vehicle body wax to the painted The replacements called for in the
surfaces that mate with the door maintenance schedule are not
and tailgate seals. needed unless the vehicle has
actually reached that time or mileage.

258
Main Menu

Taking Care of the Unexpected

This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 260


common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 261
experience with their vehicles. It If Your Engine Won’t Start ........... 267
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 268
safely evaluate the problem and what If Your Engine Overheats............. 270
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 272
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 272
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 273
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 274
on getting your vehicle towed. Emergency Towing ....................... 274
Fuses ............................................... 275
Fuse Locations ............................... 278

Taking Care of the Unexpected


259
Main Menu Table of Contents

Compact Spare Tire

Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount snow chains on a INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare.
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use the compact spare tire
soon as you can. if you are towing a trailer.

Check the inflation pressure of the Do not use your compact spare
compact spare tire every time you tire on another vehicle unless it is
check the other tires. It should be the same make and model.
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions:
Replace the tire when you can see
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) the tread wear indicator bars. The
under any circumstances. replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
This tire gives a harsher ride and same wheel. The spare tire is not
less traction on some road sur- designed to be mounted on a regular
faces. Use greater caution while wheel, and the spare wheel is not
driving. designed for mounting a regular tire.

260
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

If you have a flat tire while driving, JACK


stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.

The vehicle can easily roll off


the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.

Follow the directions for


changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the TOOLS SPARE TIRE

Taking Care of the Unexpected


jack.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
non-slippery ground. Put the and turn the ignition switch to
transmission in Park. Apply the LOCK (0). Have all the
parking brake. passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.

CONTINUED

261
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

COVER COVER

3. Open the tailgate. 5. Take the tools out of the storage 7. The spare tire is stored
compartment. underneath the rear cargo area.
4. The tools and jack are behind a Remove the plastic cover on the
cover in the cargo area on the 6. Turn the jack’s end bracket cargo area lining to access the
driver’s side. Remove the cover by counterclockwise to loosen it, then shaft for the spare tire hoist.
pushing the top of the cover. remove the jack.

262
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

WHEEL NUT WRENCH BRACKET

9. Keep turning the wheel nut 11.Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
wrench to create slack in the cable. with the wheel nut wrench.
The wheel nut wrench supplied with

Taking Care of the Unexpected


your vehicle is specially adapted to f it 10.Remove the bracket from the
the hoist shaf t. Do not use any other spare tire.
tool.

8. Put the wheel nut wrench on the


hoist shaft. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground.

CONTINUED

263
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

EXTENSION

JACKING POINT WHEEL NUT WRENCH BRAKE HUB

12. Place the jack under the jacking 13. Use the extension and the wheel 15.Before mounting the spare tire,
point nearest the tire you need to nut wrench as shown to raise the wipe any dirt off the mounting
change. It is pointed to by a △ vehicle until the flat tire is off the surface of the wheel and hub with
mark molded into the underside of ground. a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
the body. Turn the end bracket carefully; it may be hot from
clockwise until the top of the jack 14.Remove the wheel nuts, then driving.
contacts the jacking point. Make remove the flat tire.
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.

264
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

16.Put on the spare tire. Put the 20.Place the flat tire face up under
wheel nuts back on finger-tight, the hoist.
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench 21.Insert the hoist bracket into the
until the wheel is firmly against center hole of the flat tire.
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.

17.Lower the vehicle to the ground


and remove the jack.

18.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in


the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at

Taking Care of the Unexpected


the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

19.Remove the center cap from the


flat tire.

CONTINUED

265
Main Menu Table of Contents

Changing a Flat Tire

Always raise the spare tire hoist, even Loose items can fly around the
if you are not stowing a tire. If the interior in a crash and could
hoist is lef t down, it will be damaged seriously injure the occupants.
during driving and need to be replaced.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
24.Store the jack in its holder. Turn securely before driving.
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Store the tools, and install
the cover.

25.Turn off VSA (see page 212 ).


22.Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench
clockwise to take up the slack of 26.Refer to Changing a flat tire with
the hoist cable. Make sure the TPMS (see page 206 ).
bracket is seated in the center
hole of the spare tire.

23.Turn the wheel nut wrench


clockwise until the flat tire rests
against the underbody of the
vehicle and you hear the hoist
click.

266
Main Menu Table of Contents

If Your Engine Won’t Start

Diagnosing why the engine won’t Check the transmission interlock. If the headlights dim noticeably or
start falls into two areas, depending The transmission must be in Park go out when you try to start the
on what you hear when you turn the or Neutral or the starter will not engine, either the battery is dis-
key to START (III): operate. charged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
You hear nothing, or almost Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the battery and terminal connec-
nothing. The engine’s starter Turn on the headlights, and check tions (see page 257 ). You can
motor does not operate at all, or their brightness. If the headlights then try jump starting the vehicle
operates very slowly. are very dim or do not come on at from a booster battery (see page
all, the battery is discharged. See 268 ).
You can hear the starter motor Jump Starting on page 268 .
operating normally, or the starter The Starter Operates Normally
motor sounds like it is spinning Turn the ignition switch to START In this case, the starter motor’s
faster than normal, but the engine (III). If the headlights do not dim, speed sounds normal, or even faster
does not start up and run. check the condition of the fuses. If than normal, when you turn the
the fuses are OK, there is ignition switch to START (III), but

Taking Care of the Unexpected


Nothing Happens or the Starter probably something wrong with the engine does not run.
Motor Operates Very Slowly the electrical circuit for the
When you turn the ignition switch to ignition switch or starter motor. Are you using a properly coded
START (III), you do not hear the You will need a qualified key? An improperly coded key will
normal noise of the engine trying to technician to determine the cause the immobilizer system
start. You may hear a clicking sound problem (see Emergency Towing indicator in the dash panel to blink
or series of clicks, or nothing at all. on page 274 ). rapidly (see page 80 ).
Check these things:

CONTINUED

267
Main Menu Table of Contents

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting

Are you using the proper starting Jump Starting To jump start your vehicle:
procedure? Refer to Starting the Although this seems like a simple 1. Open the hood, and check the
Engine on page 199 . procedure, you should take several physical condition of the battery.
precautions. In very cold weather, check the
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel condition of the electrolyte. If it
gauge; the warning indicator may seems slushy or frozen, do not try
not be working. jump starting until it thaws.
A battery can explode if you do
There may be an electrical not follow the correct procedure,
problem, such as no power to the seriously injuring anyone
fuel pump. Check all the fuses nearby. If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
(see page 276 ). electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Keep all sparks, open flames, Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
If you find nothing wrong, you will and smoking materials away battery can cause it to rupture.
need a qualified technician to find from the battery.
the problem. See Emergency 2. Turn off all the electrical acces-
Towing on page 274 . sories: heater, A/C, climate
You cannot start your vehicle by control, audio system, lights, etc.
pushing or pulling it. Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.

3. Connect one jumper cable to the


positive (+) terminal on your
vehicle’s battery. Connect the
other end to the positive (+)
terminal on the booster battery.

268
Main Menu Table of Contents

Jump Starting

6. Start your vehicle. If the starter


motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.

7. Once the vehicle is running,


disconnect the negative cable from
the grounding strap on your
vehicle, then from the booster
battery. Disconnect the positive
cable from your vehicle, then from
BOOSTER BATTERY the booster battery.

4. Connect the second jumper cable The numbers in the illustration show Keep the ends of the jumper cables
to the negative (−) terminal on you the order to connect the jumper away from each other and any metal
the booster battery. Connect the cables. on the vehicle until everything is

Taking Care of the Unexpected


other end to the grounding strap disconnected. Otherwise, you may
as shown. Do not connect this 5. If the booster battery is in another cause an electrical short.
jumper cable to any other part of vehicle, have an assistant start
the engine. that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

269
Main Menu Table of Contents

If Your Engine Overheats

If Your Engine Overheats 1. Safely pull to the side of the road.


The pointer of your vehicle’s Put the transmission in Neutral or
temperature gauge should stay in Steam and spray from an Park, and set the parking brake.
the midrange. If it climbs to the red overheated engine can Turn off all accessories, and turn
mark, you should determine the seriously scald you. on the hazard warning indicators.
reason.
Do not open the hood if steam 2. If you see steam and/or spray
If the vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. coming from under the hood, turn
take immediate action. The only off the engine. Wait until you see
indication may be the temperature no more signs of steam or spray,
gauge climbing to or above the red then open the hood.
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood. 3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
Driving with the temperature gauge the engine should start to cool
pointer at the red mark can cause down almost immediately. If it
serious damage to your engine. does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.

270
Main Menu Table of Contents

If Your Engine Overheats

4. If the temperature gauge stays at 9. Start the engine and set the
the red mark, turn off the engine. temperature control dial to
Removing the radiator cap maximum (climate control to
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, while the engine is hot can FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
such as a split radiator hose. cause the coolant to spray out, coolant to the radiator up to the
Everything is still extremely hot, seriously scalding you. base of the filler neck. If you do
so use caution. If you find a leak, it not have the proper coolant
must be repaired before you Always let the engine and mixture available, you can add
continue driving (see Emergency radiator cool down before plain water. Remember to have
Towing on page 274 ). removing the radiator cap. the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, soon as you can.
check the coolant level in the 8. Using gloves or a large heavy
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant cloth, turn the radiator cap 10.Put the radiator cap back on
if the level is below the MIN mark. counterclockwise, without pushing tightly. Run the engine, and watch
down, to the first stop. After the the temperature gauge. If it goes

Taking Care of the Unexpected


7. If there was no coolant in the pressure releases, push down on back to the red mark, the engine
reserve tank, you may need to add the cap, and turn it until it comes needs repair (see Emergency
coolant to the radiator. Let the off. Towing on page 274 ).
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera- 11.If the temperature stays normal,
ture gauge, or lower, before check- check the coolant level in the
ing the radiator. radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.

271
Main Menu Table of Contents

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning indicators. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays when the engine is running, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. battery is not being charged.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine Open the hood, and check the oil
damage is possible and you should level (see page 189 ). An engine Immediately turn off all electrical
take immediate action. very low on oil can lose pressure accessories. Try not to use other
during cornering and other driving electrically operated controls such as
maneuvers. the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical level back to the full mark on the
damage almost immediately. Turn of f dipstick (see page 237 ). Go to a service station or garage
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get where you can get technical
the vehicle stopped. 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil assistance.
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
274 ).

272
Main Menu Table of Contents

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Malfunction Indicator Lamp If the indicator comes on repeatedly, If your vehicle battery has been
If this indicator comes on even though it may turn off as you disconnected or gone dead, these
while driving, it means one continue driving, have the vehicle codes are erased. It takes at least
of the engine’s emissions control checked by your dealer as soon as three days of driving under various
systems may have a problem. Even possible. conditions to set the codes again.
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance, it can To check if they are set, turn the
reduce your fuel economy and cause ignition to ON (II), without starting
increased emissions. Continued If you keep driving with the the engine. The Malfunction
operation may cause serious damage. Malf unction Indicator Lamp on, you Indicator Lamp will come on for 20
can damage your vehicle’s emissions seconds. If it then goes off, the
If you have recently refueled your controls and the engine. Those repairs readiness codes are set. If it blinks 5
vehicle, the indicator could come on may not be covered by your vehicle’s times, the readiness codes are not
because of a loose or missing fuel fill warranties. set. If possible, do not take your
cap. Tighten the cap until it clicks at vehicle for a state emissions test
least three times. Tightening the cap Readiness Code until the readiness codes are set.

Taking Care of the Unexpected


will not turn the indicator turn off Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness Refer to State Emissions Testing
immediately; it takes at least three codes’’ that are part of the on-board for more information (see page 294 ).
days of normal driving. diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.

273
Main Menu Table of Contents

Brake System Indicator, Emergency Towing

Brake System Indicator However, if the brake pedal does not Emergency Towing
U.S. The brake system indicator feel normal, you should take If your vehicle needs to be towed,
normally comes on when immediate action. A problem in one call a professional towing service or
you turn the ignition switch part of the system’s dual circuit organization. Never tow your vehicle
to ON (II), and as a design will still give you braking at with just a rope or chain. It is very
Canada reminder to check the two wheels. You will feel the brake dangerous.
parking brake. It will stay pedal go down much farther before The only way you can safely tow
on if you do not fully the vehicle begins to slow down, and your vehicle is with flat-bed
release the parking brake. you will have to press harder on the equipment. The operator will load
pedal. your vehicle on the back of a truck.
If the brake system indicator comes Any other method of towing will
on while driving, the brake fluid level Slow down by shifting to a lower damage the drive system. When you
is probably low. Press lightly on the gear, and pull to the side of the road contact the towing agency, inform
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. when it is safe. Because of the long them a flat-bed is required.
If it does, check the brake fluid level distance needed to stop, it is
the next time you stop at a service hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
station (see page 243 ). should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. Towing your vehicle with two tires on
If the fluid level is low, take the the ground will damage parts of the
vehicle to your dealer and have the If you must drive the vehicle a short 4WD system. It should be transported
brake system inspected for leaks or distance in this condition, drive on a f lat-bed truck or trailer.
worn brake pads. slowly and carefully.
Refer to Towing Your Vehicle
Behind a Motorhome on page
222 for non-emergency towing
information.

274
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuses

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY)


INTERIOR

The vehicle’s fuses are contained in To open the passenger’s side fuse
five fuse boxes. box, pull the right edge of the cover. UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)

Taking Care of the Unexpected


The interior fuse boxes are located The primary under-hood fuse box is
under the dashboard on the driver’s on the passenger’s side. The
and passenger’s side. secondary fuse box is next to the
battery.

275
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuses

Checking and Replacing Fuses


If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
you should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
278 and 279 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. The diagram for
the interior driver’s side fuse box is
on the kick panel below the fuse box.
Check those fuses first, but check all
the fuses before deciding that a BLOWN FUSE PULLER
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
works. the primary under-hood fuse box under-hood fuse boxes and all the
by looking through the top at the fuses in the interior fuse box by
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK wire inside. Removing these fuses pulling out each one with the fuse
(0). Make sure the headlights and requires a Phillips-head puller provided in the primary
all other accessories are off. screwdriver. under-hood fuse box.

2 Remove the cover from the fuse


box.

276
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuses

If you cannot drive the vehicle


BLOWN without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse Replacing a f use with one that has a
of the same rating or a lower rating higher rating greatly increases the
from one of the other circuits. Make chances of damaging the electrical
sure you can do without that circuit system. If you do not have a
temporarily (such as the accessory replacement f use with the proper rating
power socket or radio). f or the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it 6. If the replacement fuse of the
might blow out again. This does not same rating blows in a short time,
indicate anything wrong. Replace the there is probably a serious
5. Look for a burned wire inside the fuse with one of the correct rating as electrical problem with your
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with soon as you can. vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
one of the spare fuses of the same that circuit, and have your vehicle

Taking Care of the Unexpected


rating or lower. checked by a qualified mechanic.

If the radio fuse is removed, the


audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequency
display. Use the preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
131 ).

277
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuse Locations

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX


No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

1 20 A Spare Fuse 14 40 A Power Seat


2 30 A Spare Fuse 15 40 A Heater Motor
3 20 A Right Headlight 16 30 A Cooling Fan
4 15 A ACG S 17 7.5 A Spare Fuse
5 15 A Hazard 18 10 A Spare Fuse
6 − Not used 19 15 A Spare Fuse
7 20 A Stop 20 120 A Battery
8 20 A Left Headlight 21 30 A Condenser Fan
9 20 A Radio 22 7.5 A MG Clutch
10 40 A Power Window Motor 23 50 A IGI Main
11 30 A Rear A/C 24 20 A Fog Lights
12 30 A Rear Defroster
13 40 A Back Up, ACC

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX


No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

1 20 A Rear Entertainment System 6 15 A ETC


2 40 A VSA F/S Relay 7 15 A IG Coil
3 30 A VSA Motor 8 15 A LAF
4 20 A 4WD 9 7.5 A FI-Back-up
5 20 A Rear Accessory Socket 10 20 A P/W DR

278
Main Menu Table of Contents

Fuse Locations

INTERIOR FUSE BOX


Driver’s Side No. Amps. Circuits Protected Passenger’s Side No. Amps. Circuits Protected

1 15 A Fuel Pump 1 30 A Moonroof


2 10 A SRS 2 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
3 7.5 A Heater Control, A/C Clutch Front 3 20 A Passenger’s Power Seat Sliding
Front Relay, Cooling Fan Relay 4 20 A Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
4 7.5 A Power Mirror 5 20 A Passenger’s Power Seat
5 10 A Daytime Running Light*/ Reclining
Rear Wiper 6 10 A Daytime Running Light,
6 15 A ECU (PCM), Cruise Control OnStar*
7 7.5 A OPDS, OnStar 7 20 A Driver’s side Rear Power
8 7.5 A ACC Relay Window
9 10 A Back-up Lights, Instrument 8 20 A Front Passenger’s Power
Lights, TPMS Window
10 7.5 A Turn Signals 9 15 A Front Accessory Socket,

Taking Care of the Unexpected


11 15 A IG Coil HFL, OnStar
12 30 A Front Wiper 10 15 A Small Light
13 − Not Used 11 10 A Interior Light, TPMS, HFL
* : Canadian models 12 20 A Power Door Lock
Driver’s Side
Auxiliary 13 7.5 A Back Up, Clock
No. Amps. Circuits Protected 14 20 A Heated Seat
15 20 A Driver’s Power Window
1 7.5 A Horn 16 20 A Passenger’s Side Rear
2 7.5 A ELD Unit, Immobilizer Control Power Window
Unit, VSA Control Unit, Alternator
3 7.5 A Auto Wipers * : Canadian models

279
Main Menu

280
Main Menu

Technical Information

The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 282 Emissions Controls........................ 289
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 284 The Clean Air Act ...................... 289
your vehicle, and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 286 Crankcase Emissions Control
identification numbers. It also Uniform Tire Quality System..................................... 289
includes information you should Grading ................................... 286 Evaporative Emissions Control
know about your vehicle’s tires and Treadwear .................................. 286 System..................................... 289
emissions control systems. Traction....................................... 286 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Temperature .............................. 287 Recovery ................................. 289
Tire Labeling .................................. 288 Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 290
PGM-FI System ..................... 290
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 290
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 290
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 290
Replacement Parts..................... 290
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 291

Technical Information
State Emissions Testing ............... 292

281
Main Menu Table of Contents

Identification Numbers

Your vehicle has several identifying


numbers located in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number


(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Acura dealer uses to register your
vehicle for warranty purposes. It is
also necessary for licensing and
insuring your vehicle. The easiest
place to find the VIN is on a plate
fastened to the top of the dashboard.
You can see it by looking through
the windshield on the driver’s side. It
is also on the Certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
Certification label.

CERTIFICATION LABEL

282
Main Menu Table of Contents

Identification Numbers

The Engine Number is stamped into


the engine block. It is on the front. ENGINE NUMBER

The transmission number is on a


label on top of the transmission.

Technical Information
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

283
Main Menu Table of Contents

Specifications

Dimensions Capacities
Length 188.7 in (4,793 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 77.0 in (1,955 mm) 20.4 US gal (77.0 )
*1
Height Standard 68.7 in (1,744 mm) Engine Change 1.88 US gal (7.1 )
Premium 71.3 in (1,811 mm) coolant Total 2.38 US gal (9.0 )
Wheelbase 106.3 in (2,700 mm) Engine oil Change*2
Track Front 66.3 in (1,685 mm) Including 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
Rear 66.5 in (1,690 mm) filter
Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Weights filter
Gross vehicle weight rating See the tire information label atta- Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
ched to the driver’s doorjamb. Automatic Change 2.9 US qt (2.7 )
Gross combined weight*2 9,835 lbs (4,461 kg)*1 transmission Total 7.7 US qt (7.3 )
rating (GCWR) fluid
Rear Change 2.9 US qt (2.7 )
*1 : Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steering fluid differential Total 3.0 US qt (2.8 )
cooler. fluid
*2 : The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305 Transfer Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 )
meters) of elevation. assembly Total 0.48 US qt (0.45 )
fluid
Air Conditioning Windshield
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) washer 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Charge quantity 24.7−26.5 oz (700−750 g) reservoir
Lubricant type ND-OIL8
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

284
Main Menu Table of Contents

Specifications

Lights Fuses
Headlights High 12 V − 60 W (HB3) Interior Driver’s side See page 279 or the fuse label
Low 12 V − 55 W (H11) attached to the dashboard.
Front side marker lights 12 V − 3 CP Passenger’s side See page 279 or the fuse label
Front turn signal lights/ 12 V − 28/8 W attached to the inside of the fuse
Parking lights box door under the dashboard.
Fog light 12 V − 51 W (HB4) Under-hood See page 278 or the fuse box
Front foot lights 12 V − 5W cover.
Rear turn signal/hazard lights 12 V − 21 W
Brake/Taillights 12 V − 21 W/5 W Engine
Backup lights 12 V − 21 CP (18 W) Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,
License plate lights 12 V − 3 CP V6 gasoline engine
High-mount brake light 12 V − 21 W Bore x Stroke 3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
Individual map lights Front 12 V − 5W Displacement 211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )
Rear 12 V − 5W Compression ratio 10.0 : 1
Cargo area light 12 V − 5W Spark plugs NGK: IZFR5K-11
Tailgate light 12 V − 5W DENSO: SKJ16DR-M11
Vanity mirror light 12 V − 1.1 W
Door light 12 V − 3.8 W Alignment
Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)

Technical Information
Battery Rear 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Capacity 12 V − 52 AH/5 HR Camber Front −0°50’
12 V − 65 AH/20 HR Rear −0°50’
Caster Front 1°53’

Tires
Size Front/Rear P235/65R17 103T
Spare T155/90D16 110M
Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

285
Main Menu Table of Contents

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction − AA, A, B, C


U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between the tread shoulder and the depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices, and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A

All passenger vehicle tires must


conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these
grades.

286
Main Menu Table of Contents

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature − A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for


The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not over-
tire’s resistance to the generation of loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
heat and its ability to dissipate heat tion, or excessive loading, either
when tested under controlled separately or in combination, can
conditions on a specified indoor cause heat buildup and possible tire
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance, which all passenger
vehicle tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of

Technical Information
performance on the laboratory test
wheel than the minimum required by
law.

287
Main Menu Table of Contents

Tire Labeling

The tires that came on your vehicle 16 − Rim diameter in inches. 2202 − Date of manufacture.
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described 94 − Load index (a numerical code
below. associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Tire Size
Whenever tires are replaced, they V − Speed symbol (an
should be replaced with tires of the alphabetical code indicating
same size. The following is an the maximum speed rating).
example of tire size with an
explanation of what each component Tire Identification Number
means. Tire Identification Number (TIN) is
a group of numbers and letters that
P225/55R16 94V look like the following example TIN.

P − Vehicle type (P indicates DOT B97R FW6X 2202


passenger vehicle).
DOT − This indicates that the tire
225 − Tire width in millimeters. meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
55 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section Transportation.
height as a percentage of its
width). B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
R − Tire construction code (R
indicates radial). FW6X − Tire type code.

288
Main Menu Table of Contents

Emissions Controls

The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act crankcase ventilation valve routes
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act* them from the crankcase back to the
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile intake manifold. They are then
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that drawn into the engine and burned.
(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls Evaporative Emissions Control
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain System
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. tank, an evaporative emissions
ment. Under certain conditions of Scheduled maintenance is on page control canister filled with charcoal
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC 231 . adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ canister while the engine is off. After

Carbon monoxide does not contri- In Canada, Acura vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
bute to smog creation, but it is a with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
poisonous gas. requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery

Technical Information
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive

289
Main Menu Table of Contents

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts


The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. together in reducing emissions to
recirculation and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Acura replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is tion.
multiport fuel injection. in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, it converts HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.

290
Main Menu Table of Contents

Three Way Catalytic Converter

The three way catalytic converter


contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Acura part
or its equivalent.
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER CONVERTER
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic Keep the engine tuned-up.
place. It can set on fire any com- converter contributes to air pollution,
bustible materials that come near it. and can impair your engine’s per- Have your vehicle diagnosed and
Park your vehicle away from high formance. Follow these guidelines to repaired if it is misfiring, back-
grass, dry leaves, or other flamma- protect your vehicle’s three way firing, stalling, or otherwise not

Technical Information
bles. catalytic converter. running properly.

Always use unleaded gasoline.


Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.

291
Main Menu Table of Contents

State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes If the testing facility determines that Without touching the accelerator
If you take your vehicle for a state the readiness codes are not set, you pedal, start the engine, and let it
emissions test shortly after the will be requested to return at a later idle for 20 seconds.
battery has been disconnected or date to complete the test. If you must
gone dead, it may not pass the test. get the vehicle retested within the Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness next two or three days, you can the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
codes’’ that must be set in the on- condition the vehicle for retesting by hold it there until the temperature
board diagnostics for the emissions doing the following. gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
systems. These codes are erased scale (about 3 minutes).
when the battery is disconnected, Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
and set again only after several days but not completely full (around
of driving under a variety of 3/4).
conditions.
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.

Make sure the ambient


temperature is between 20° and
95°F.

292
Main Menu Table of Contents

State Emissions Testing

Select a nearby lightly traveled If the testing facility determines the


major highway where you can readiness codes are still not set, see
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph your dealer.
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).

Then drive in city/suburban

Technical Information
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.

293
Main Menu

294
Main Menu

Warranty and Customer Relations

Customer Service
Information ................................. 296
Warranty Coverages ..................... 297
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 298

Warranty and Customer Relations


Authorized Manuals ...................... 299

295
Main Menu Table of Contents

Customer Service Information

Acura dealership personnel are In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should Islands: us this information:
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your Bella International Corp. Vehicle Identification Number
dealership does not solve to your C-1 Bechara St. Segarra Corner (see page 282 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with Puerto Nuevo, Puerto Rico 00920 Name and address of the dealer
the dealership’s management. The who services your vehicle
service manager or general manager Tel:(787) 620-7028 Date of purchase
can help. Almost all problems are Mileage on your vehicle
solved in this way. Canadian Owners: Your name, address, and tele-
CUSTOMER RELATIONS phone number
If you are dissatisfied with the RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE A detailed description of the
decision made by the dealership’s Honda Canada Inc. problem
management, contact the Acura 715 Milner Avenue Name of the dealer who sold the
Customer Service Office. Toronto, ON vehicle to you
M1B 2K8
U.S. Owners:
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9
Acura Client Services Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Mail Stop 500-2N-7E Toronto (416) 287-4776
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

296
Main Menu Table of Contents

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered for the useful life of the coverage for a replacement battery
vehicle. purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −

Warranty and Customer Relations


covers your new vehicle, except for Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control − all exterior body panels are Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories, against covered for rust-through from the coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and inside for the specified time period chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. with no mileage limit. vehicle.

Emissions Control Systems Defects Accessory Limited Warranty − Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Acura accessories are covered under all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two this warranty. Time and mileage 2005 Acura Warranty Information
warranties cover your vehicle’s limits depend on the type of booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, accessory and other factors. Please for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are read your warranty manual for coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your details. tires are covered by their
warranty manual for exact manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. Replacement Parts Limited information is in a separate booklet.
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − covers all Acura
Warranty − this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Canadian Owners
to 100 percent credit toward a materials and workmanship. Please refer to the 2005 Warranty
replacement battery. Manual that came with your vehicle.

297
Main Menu Table of Contents

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar To contact NHTSA, you may either
defect which could cause a crash or complaints, it may open an call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
could cause injury or death, you investigation, and if it finds that a at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
should immediately inform the safety defect exists in a group of Washington D.C. area) or write to:
National Highway Traffic Safety vehicles, it may order a recall and NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Administration (NHTSA), in addition remedy campaign. However, NHTSA Transportation, Washington,
to notifying American Honda Motor cannot become involved in individual D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
Co., Inc. problems between you, your dealer, other information about motor
or Acura Automobile Division, vehicle safety from the Hotline.
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

298
Main Menu Table of Contents

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm contact their authorized Acura dealer.
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
at 1-800-782-4356. OR
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
Publication Form Description Price pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Form Number Each* Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
61S3V05 2003-2005 Acura MDX Service Manual $69.00

Authorized Manuals
61S3V05EL 2003-05 Acura MDX $47.00 VEHICLE MODEL Price Total
PUBLICATION NUMBER Qty
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual 2 Name Year Each* Price

61S3V30 2001-05 Acura MDX $44.00 0
Body Repair Manual 5
31S3V640 2005 Acura MDX Owner’s Manual $37.00
31S3V840 2005 Acura MDX $29.00


Navigation Manual U
31S3V920 2005 Acura MDX Maintenance Journal $12.00

31S3VQ20 2005 Acura MDX Quick Start Guide $12.00 Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL

ACU-R Order Form for Previous Years- FREE notice and without incurring obligation.
Mich. Purchases
Indicate Year and Model Desired Add 6% Sales Tax

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.95

allow adequate time for delivery.


GRAND TOTAL

299
Main Menu Table of Contents

Authorized Manuals

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, Service Manual:
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown This manual covers maintenance and recommended
below for a quotation. procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
S It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
H enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
I stand.
Customer Name Attention

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
T Street Address − No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number
This manual complements the service manual by
O providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
City State & Zip Code
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Daytime Telephone Number ( )
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only. replacement of damaged body parts.
P Do not send cash

A Master VISA Check here if your billing address is different


Y Card from the shipping address shown above.

M Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

E −


CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

300
Main Menu

Index

A Shifting ........................................ 200 Braking System.............................. 208


Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 200 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 186
Accessories and Modifications .... 191 Shift Lever Positions ................. 200 Brightness Control, Instruments ... 76
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Shift Lock Release ..................... 203 Brights, Headlights ......................... 74
Position) ........................................ 81 Automatic Wipers ............................ 72 Bulb Replacement
Accessory Power Sockets............. 104 Back-up Lights ........................... 247
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 238 B Brake Lights............................... 247
Airbag (SRS) .............................. 11, 24 Front Parking Lights ................. 246
Air Conditioning System ............... 106 Battery Front Side Marker Lights......... 246
Rear A/C Control ...................... 111 Charging System Headlights .................................. 245
Usage .......................................... 107 Indicator............................ 60, 272 High-mount Brake Light .......... 248
Air Outlets (Vents) ........................ 108 Jump Starting ............................. 268 Rear Bulbs .................................. 247
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 252 Maintenance ............................... 257 Specifications ............................. 285
Antifreeze ....................................... 240 Specifications ............................. 285 Turn Signal Lights ..................... 246
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Before Driving ............................... 185 Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 245
Indicator Light ..................... 61, 209 Belts, Seat ................................... 10, 21
Operation .................................... 209 Beverage Holders .......................... 102
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 131 Booster Seats ................................... 51
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 81 Brakes
Audio System ................. 112, 118, 123 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 209
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 22 Break-in, New Linings .............. 186
Automatic Lighting.......................... 75 Fluid ............................................ 243
Automatic Speed Control.............. 146 Bulb Replacement ..................... 247

INDEX
Automatic Transmission............... 200 Parking .......................................... 94
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 284 System Indicator .................. 61, 274
Checking Fluid Level ................ 242 Wear Indicators ......................... 208 CONTINUED

I
Main Menu

Index

C LATCH.......................................... 45 D
Risks with Airbags....................... 36
Cancel Button................................. 146 Small Children.............................. 41 DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii
Capacities Chart............................. 284 Tether ........................................... 48 Dashboard .................................... 4, 58
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 54 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 36 Daytime Running Lights................. 76
Carrying Cargo .............................. 193 Child Seats ........................................ 43 Dead Battery .................................. 268
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii Tether Anchorage Points ........... 48 Defects, Reporting Safety............. 298
CD Care .......................................... 128 Climate Control System ................ 106 Defogger, Rear Window ................. 77
CD Changer ........................... 125, 126 Clock ............................................... 151 Defrosting the Windows ............... 109
CD Changer Error Messages ...... 129 Code, Audio System ...................... 131 Dimensions ..................................... 284
CD Player........................................ 125 CO in the Exhaust ......................... 289 Dimming the Headlights ................ 74
Certification Label ......................... 282 Compact Spare Tire....................... 260 Dipstick
Chains, tires .................................... 256 Consumer Information*................ 296 Automatic Transmission........... 242
Change Oil Controls, Instruments and .............. 57 Engine Oil ................................... 190
How to ......................................... 238 Coolant Directional Signals ........................... 74
When to....................................... 229 Adding ......................................... 240 Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 208
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 261 Checking ..................................... 190 Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 239
Charging System Indicator .... 60, 272 Proper Solution .......................... 240 Doors
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 198 Temperature Gauge .................... 69 Locking and Unlocking ............... 82
Childproof Door Locks ................... 82 Crankcase Emissions Control Lockout Prevention ..................... 82
Child Safety ...................................... 35 System......................................... 289 Power Door Locks ....................... 82
Booster Seats ............................... 51 Cruise Control Indicator ................. 63 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 286
Child Seats .............................. 43, 44 Cruise Control Operation ............. 146 Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 7
Important Safety Reminders ...... 38 Cup Holders.................................... 102 Driving ............................................ 197
Infants ........................................... 40 Customer Relations Office ........... 296 Economy ..................................... 190
Larger Children ........................... 50

II
Main Menu

Index

Driving Position Memory Malfunction Indicator Floor Mats ...................................... 249


System ........................................... 97 Lamp ................................. 60, 273 Fluids
DVD Error Messages ................... 141 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 60, 272 Automatic Transmission........... 242
DVD Player .................................... 134 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 237 Brake ........................................... 243
Overheating................................ 270 Power Steering........................... 244
E Specifications ............................. 285 Windshield Washer ................... 241
Speed Limiter ............................. 202 FM Stereo Radio
Economy, Fuel ............................... 190 Starting........................................ 189 Reception .................................... 116
Emergencies................................... 259 Engine, if it won’t start .................... 267 Fog Lights......................................... 77
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 268 Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 289 Folding the Second Seat ................. 89
Brake System Indicator ............ 274 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 54 Folding the Third Seat .................... 90
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 261 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Four-way Flashers ........................... 76
Charging System Indicator ...... 272 System......................................... 290 Front Seat ......................................... 86
Checking the Fuses................... 276 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat Adjusting ....................................... 86
Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 76 Belts by ......................................... 18 Airbags .......................................... 26
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 272 Heaters.......................................... 91
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 273 F Fuel .................................................. 186
Overheated Engine ................... 270 Fill Door and Cap....................... 187
Towing ........................................ 274 Fan, Interior.................................... 107 Gauge ............................................ 68
Emergency Brake ............................ 94 Features, Comfort and Octane Requirement ................. 186
Emergency Flashers ....................... 76 Convenience ............................... 105 Oxygenated ................................ 186
Emergency Towing ....................... 274 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 187 Reserve Indicator......................... 63
Emissions Controls........................ 289 Filters

INDEX
Tank, Filling the......................... 187
Engine Oil ................................................ 238 Fuses, Checking the ...................... 276
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 69 Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 76
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 261 CONTINUED

III
Main Menu

Index

G H I
Gas Mileage, Improving................ 190 Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 245 Identification Number, Vehicle.... 282
Gasoline .......................................... 186 HandsFreeLink .............................. 160 Ignition
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 63 HFL Buttons............................... 161 Keys............................................... 79
Gauge ............................................ 68 Hazard Warning Flashers............... 76 Switch ............................................ 81
Octane Requirement ................. 186 Headlights......................................... 74 Timing Control System ............. 290
Tank, Filling the......................... 187 Aiming ......................................... 245 Immobilizer System......................... 80
Gas Station Procedures................. 187 Automatic Lighting ..................... 75 Important Safety Precautions .......... 8
Gauges Daytime Running Lights............. 76 Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 60
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 69 High Beam Indicator ................... 63 ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 61
Fuel ................................................ 68 High Beams, Turning on ............ 74 A/T Temp..................................... 64
Speedometer ................................ 68 Low Beams, Turning on ............. 74 Brake (Parking and Brake
Tachometer .................................. 68 Reminder Chime .......................... 74 System) ..................................... 61
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 245 Brake Lamp .................................. 62
Rating) ........................................ 214 Turning on .................................... 74 Charging System ......................... 60
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight Headphones.................................... 147 Cruise Control .............................. 63
Rating) ........................................ 214 Head Restraints ............................... 88 DRL (Daytime Running
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 200 Heated Mirror .................................. 96 Lights)....................................... 63
Glove Box ....................................... 102 Heaters, Seats .................................. 91 High Beam.................................... 63
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Heating and Cooling ...................... 106 Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 61
Rating) ........................................ 214 High-Low Beam Switch .................. 74 Lights On ...................................... 64
HomeLink Universal Low Fuel ....................................... 63
Transceiver................................. 156 Low Oil Pressure ......................... 60
Hood, Opening the ........................ 188 Low Tire Pressure ....................... 66
Horn................................................... 70 Maintenance Required................ 67

IV
Main Menu

Index

Side Airbag Off ............................ 60 J Fuel Fill Door ............................. 187


Seat Belt ........................................ 60 Glove Box ................................... 102
SRS ................................................ 60 Jacking up the Vehicle .................. 264 Lockout Prevention ..................... 82
Tire Pressure Monitor ................ 66 Jack, Tire ........................................ 261 Power Door .................................. 82
TPMS System .............................. 66 Jump Starting ................................. 268 Low Coolant Level ......................... 190
Turn Signal and Hazard Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 63
Warning .................................... 62 K Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 60, 272
VSA Activation ............................. 65 Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 284
VSA System .................................. 65 Keys ................................................... 79 Luggage, storing (cargo) ................ 193
VTM-4 ........................................... 64
Washer Level ............................... 63 L M
Individual Map Lights ................... 100
Infant Restraint ................................ 40 Label, Certification ........................ 282 Maintenance ................................... 227
Infant Seats ....................................... 40 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 74 Owner’s Maintenance
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 252 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 16, 21 Checks .................................... 230
Inside Mirror .................................... 95 Light Control Switch ....................... 99 Record .................................. 233-235
Inspection, Tire .............................. 253 Lights Required Indicator ....................... 67
Instrument Panel ......................... 4, 59 Bulb Replacement ..................... 245 Safety........................................... 228
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 76 Indicator ........................................ 60 Schedule .............................. 229-232
Interior Lights .................................. 99 Interior .......................................... 99 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 60, 273
Introduction ......................................... i Parking .......................................... 74 Manual Seat Adjustments............... 87
Turn Signal ................................... 74 Memory, Driving Position .............. 97
Load Limit .............................. 194, 213

INDEX
Meters, Gauges ................................ 68
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 81 Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 95
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 81 CONTINUED

V
Main Menu

Index

Modifying Your Vehicle................ 192 Outside Mirrors ............................... 95 Using Child Seats with
Moonroof .......................................... 93 Overheating, Engine ..................... 270 Tethers...................................... 48
Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 230 Using LATCH .............................. 45
N Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 186
R
Neutral Gear Position.................... 201 P
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 186 Radiator Overheating .................... 270
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Panel Brightness Control ............... 76 Radio/CD Sound System...... 112, 113
Numbers, Identification ................ 282 Park Gear Position......................... 201 Rear A/C Unit ................................ 111
Parking ............................................ 207 Rear Audio Control Panel ............. 136
O Parking Brake .................................. 94 Rear Entertainment System ......... 132
Parking Lights.................................. 74 Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 247
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 186 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 291 Rear View Camera and Monitor .. 155
Odometer .......................................... 68 PGM-FI System.............................. 290 Rear View Mirror ............................. 95
Odometer, Trip ................................ 69 Power Seat Adjustments ................. 86 Rear Window Defogger .................. 77
Off-Highway Driving ..................... 223 Power Socket Locations................ 104 Rear Window Wiper and Washer .. 73
Off-Road Precautions .................... 223 Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 18 Reclining the Seat Backs .......... 86, 87
Oil Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 13 Reclining the Second Seats ............ 89
Change, How to ......................... 238 Additional Safety Precautions .... 19 Reclining the Third Seat ................. 90
Change, When to ....................... 231 Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18 Reminder Lights .............................. 60
Checking Engine ....................... 189 Protecting Children ......................... 35 Remote Audio Controls................. 130
Pressure Indicator ............... 60, 272 General Guidelines ...................... 35 Remote Control (RES) .................. 137
Selecting Proper Viscosity Protecting Infants ........................ 40 Remote Transmitter ........................ 83
Chart ....................................... 237 Protecting Larger Children ........ 50
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 81 Protecting Small Children .......... 41
OnStar ............................................. 173

VI
Main Menu

Index

Replacement Information Satellite Radio, XM ........................ 118 Shifting the Automatic


Engine Oil and Filter ................. 238 Seat Belts .................................... 10, 21 Transmission .............................. 200
Fuses ........................................... 271 Additional Information ................ 21 Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 200
Light Bulbs ................................. 245 Automatic Seat Belt Shift Lock Release ......................... 203
Schedule ..................................... 229 Tensioners ................................ 22 Side Airbags ..................................... 29
Timing Belt ................................. 244 Cleaning ...................................... 249 Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 31
Tires ............................................ 252 Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 21 Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Wiper Blades .............................. 250 Maintenance ................................. 23 Replacement in .......................... 246
Replacing Seat Belts After a Reminder Light and Signaling Turns ................................ 74
Crash ............................................. 23 Beeper ................................. 21, 60 Snow Tires ...................................... 256
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 190 System Components.................... 21 Sound System................. 112, 118, 123
Reverse Gear Position................... 201 Use During Pregnancy................ 18 Spare Tire
Rotation, Tire ................................. 254 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 16 Inflating............................... 253, 260
Seats .................................................. 86 Specifications ............................. 285
S Adjusting the Second Seat .......... 89 Specifications Charts..................... 284
Adjusting the Third Seat ............ 90 Speed Control ................................. 146
Safety Belts................................. 10, 21 Folding the Second Seat ............. 89 Speedometer .................................... 68
Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 298 Folding the Third Seat ................ 90 SRS, Additional Information........... 24
Safety Features .................................. 9 Head Restraints ........................... 88 Additional Safety Precautions .... 34
Airbags .......................................... 11 Third Row Access........................ 90 Airbag System Components ....... 24
Door Locks ................................... 13 Security System ............................. 145 Airbag Service .............................. 33
Head Restraints ........................... 15 Serial Number ................................ 282 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 32
Seat Belts ................................ 10, 16 Service Intervals ............................ 231

INDEX
How Your Front Airbags
Seats & Seat-Backs ................ 13, 14 Service Manual* ............................ 299 Work.......................................... 26
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 55 Service Station Procedures .......... 187
Safety Messages ................................ ii CONTINUED

VII
Main Menu

Index

How Your Side Airbags Work.... 29 Technical Descriptions Maintenance ............................... 254
How Your Side Curtain Airbags DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 286 Replacing .................................... 255
Work.......................................... 31 Emissions Control Systems ...... 289 Rotating....................................... 254
SRS Indicator.............................. 31, 60 Three Way Catalytic Snow ............................................ 256
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 81 Converter ................................ 291 Specifications ............................. 285
Starting the Engine........................ 198 Temperature Gauge ........................ 69 Tire Chains ................................. 256
With a Dead Battery ................. 268 Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 22 Towing
State Emissions Testing ............... 292 Theft Protection............................. 131 A Trailer ...................................... 213
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 270 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 291 Emergency Wrecker ................. 274
Steering Wheel Timing Belt ..................................... 244 Equipment and Accessories ..... 217
Adjustment ................................... 78 Tire Chains ..................................... 256 Weight Limit .............................. 213
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 81 Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 261 Your Vehicle Behind a
Stereo Sound System .... 112, 118, 123 Tire Labeling .................................. 288 Motorhome............................. 222
Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 258 Tire Pressure Monitoring Trailer Loading .......................... 215
Sun Visor......................................... 103 System (TPMS) ..................... 205 Trailer Towing Tips .................. 220
Supplemental Restraint System Low Tire Pressure Transmission
Servicing ....................................... 33 Indicator............................ 66, 205 Checking Fluid Level ................ 242
SRS Indicator.......................... 31, 60 Tire Pressure Monitor ........ 66, 206 Fluid Selection............................ 242
System Components.................... 24 TPMS Indicator ................... 66, 206 Identification Number ............... 282
Synthetic Oil ................................... 238 Tires ................................................ 252 Shifting the Automatic .............. 200
Air Pressure ............................... 252 Treadwear ...................................... 286
T Checking Wear .......................... 254 Trip Computer ............................... 149
Compact Spare ........................... 260 Trip Meter ........................................ 69
Tachometer ...................................... 68 DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 286 Turn Signals ..................................... 74
Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 247 Inflation ....................................... 252 Tools, Tire Changing .................... 261
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 259 Inspection ................................... 253

VIII
Main Menu

Index

U W X

Unexpected, Taking Care WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii XM Satellite Radio ......................... 118
of the ........................................... 259 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 55
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 286 Warranty Coverages* ................... 297 *
: U.S. and Canada only
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 186 Washer, Windshield
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 239 Checking the Fluid Level ......... 241
Level Indicator ............................. 63
V Operation ...................................... 71
Wheels
Vanity Mirror ................................. 103 Adjusting the Steering ................ 78
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 194 Wrench ....................................... 263
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 284 Windows
Vehicle Identification Number..... 282 Operating the Power ................... 92
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) Rear, Defogger ............................ 77
System..................................... 211 Windshield
VSA System Indicator ......... 65, 211 Defroster .................................... 109
VSA Activation Indicator .... 65, 211 Washers ........................................ 71
VSA Off Switch .......................... 214 Wipers, Windshield
Vehicle Storage .............................. 258 Changing Blades ........................ 250
Ventilation ...................................... 108 Operation ...................................... 71
VIN .................................................. 282 Rear Windshield Wiper and
Viscosity, Oil................................... 237 Washer ...................................... 73

INDEX
VTM-4 Lock ................................... 204 Worn Tires ..................................... 253
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 274

IX
Main Menu

Service Information Summary

Gasoline: Automatic Transmission Fluid: Tire Pressure (measured cold):


Premium unleaded gasoline, Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic Front/Rear:
pump octane number of 91 or Transmission Fluid) preferred, or 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
higher. a DEXRON III ATF as a Compact Spare Tire:
temporary replacement (see page 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Fuel Tank Capacity: 242 ).
20.4 US gal (77.0 )
Power Steering Fluid:
Recommended Engine Oil: Honda Power Steering Fluid
API Premium grade 5W-20 preferred, or another brand of
detergent oil (see page 237 ). power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
Oil change capacity (including use ATF (see page 244 ).
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 243 ).

You might also like